Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent
NPO Analysis Desktop User Guide | Release M4
NPO Document
User Guide
npoug
3BK174465110TQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10
March 2011
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Contents
Preface
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................ xxix
xxix
1 Introduction to NPO
Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and function classifications .................................................... 2-6
2-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary iii
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customize analysis desktop ................................................................................................................................................ 2-34
2-34
Procedure 3-1: Propagate network objects or object zones between topology classification or zone
modes .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execution context ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3-19
4 Topology objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary v
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 6-5: Apply filter on topology classification ............................................................................................. 6-13
6-13
Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and descriptions ......................................................... 9-46
9-46
Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and descriptions ...................................................... 9-53
9-53
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-6: Display counter and indicator values ................................................................................................ 9-68
9-68
10 Manage parameters
Import / update / export / delete user defined operator reference values ........................................................... 12-5
12-5
13 Use rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary vii
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Use events
17 Use favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder ............................................................................. 17-12
17-12
18 Views
Procedure 18-4: Edit executed view using dialog box ........................................................................................... 18-75
18-75
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary ix
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Reports
Procedure 19-4: Edit executed report using dialog box ......................................................................................... 19-54
19-54
Procedure 19-7: Edit view from executed report template ................................................................................... 19-84
19-84
Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports ................................................................................... 19-94
19-94
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports ............................................................................. 19-96
19-96
20 MultiNET Mode
21 POD mode
22 Diagnosis
Propagate selection between synthetic and detailed report and topology classifications ............................ 22-7
22-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xi
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Close executed detailed diagnosis ................................................................................................................................. 22-24
22-24
23 Tuning
24 Cartography
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Alerters
26 User preferences
27 Icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xiii
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
List of tables
4-1 Cell2G object properties frequencies and TRX mapping ......................................................................... 4-16
11-1 Description of Parameters from the Reference Values Header ............................................................... 11-3
18-3 Example of Highlighting Colors (UpperIsFault = true for Indicators) ............................................. 18-83
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xv
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-8 Function icons - Design ...................................................................................................................................... 27-17
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
3-2 Filter options panel inside Execution Context window ............................................................................ 3-29
11-1 Example of Columns Header for Reference Values File .......................................................................... 11-4
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xvii
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-4 Mono-object evolution view ............................................................................................................................. 14-14
14-6 Event synthesis in tabular mode of mono-object evolution view ....................................................... 14-18
18-1 Differences of view template indicator properties depending on mode .............................................. 18-7
18-2 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns ............................................................ 18-8
18-3 Matrix view templates without grid with independent columns ............................................................ 18-8
18-4 Matrix view templates without grid without independent columns ..................................................... 18-9
18-5 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns ............................................................ 18-9
18-6 Matrix view templates with grid with independent columns .................................................................. 18-9
18-14 Multi-object evolution with multiple network objects, one counter and several dates ............... 18-45
18-15 Multi-counters, one object evolution with raw counters ........................................................................ 18-45
18-16 Indicator view, multiple network objects, one indicator, several dates ............................................. 18-45
18-17 Indicator view, one network object, multiple indicators, several dates ............................................ 18-46
18-18 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, one date .......................................... 18-46
18-19 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, several dates ................................. 18-46
18-22 Equipment view with Preferred Date Display Type=Visible and Among Network Objects No with
N=10 and Top N Item = Alarm-Specific Problem ................................................................................. 18-47
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-24 Multi-object evolution view ............................................................................................................................. 18-48
18-26 Multiple network object, multiple indicators, several dates ................................................................. 18-49
18-28 Matrix view with static bound out-of range values .................................................................................. 18-50
18-29 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm Perceived Severity, Among
Network Objects=No) ...................................................................................................................................... 18-50
18-30 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm Perceived Severity, Among
Network Objects=No) ...................................................................................................................................... 18-51
18-31 Equipment view with Visible Dates Example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm Perceived Severity,
Among Network Objects=No) ..................................................................................................................... 18-51
18-32 Raw graphical display for one counter, multi-object evolution ........................................................... 18-52
18-33 Raw graphical display for multi-counter, one object evolution ........................................................... 18-52
18-36 Highlighting changes when critical values are selected in legend ...................................................... 18-89
19-3 Multi-object evolution table made with an object list ............................................................................... 19-5
19-4 Example of multi-object evolution table made with an object list ........................................................ 19-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xix
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-13 Example warning table for area threshold ................................................................................................... 19-15
19-15 Number of reports generated based on report type, number of network objects, and number of
report templates selected ................................................................................................................................. 19-31
19-16 Multi-object evolution report with spatial aggregation option ............................................................ 19-93
19-17 Multi-object evolution view with spatial aggregation option ............................................................... 19-93
19-18 Multi-object comparison view with spatial aggregation option .......................................................... 19-94
22-1 Example view tabular mode - multi-object comparison containing diagnosis ................................. 22-9
23-5 Tuning session window - relation tuning - new object ........................................................................... 23-49
24-11 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded ............................................. 24-41
24-12 Example of Site Exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed ............................................ 24-42
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-13 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where cells are not shown ............ 24-42
24-17 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded ............................................. 24-51
24-18 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed ............................................. 24-52
24-19 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where cells are not shown ............ 24-52
24-23 Example THL template with one criterion legend .................................................................................... 24-95
24-24 Example THL template with two criteria legend ...................................................................................... 24-96
24-27 Non co-localized cells in full-expanded / expanded rendering mode ............................................. 24-103
24-29 Packed links for colocalized cells in collapsed rendering mode ....................................................... 24-104
24-30 Packed links for colocalized cells in expanded rendering mode ...................................................... 24-105
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxi
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
2-4 Use standards, modes, topology and function classifications ................................................................... 2-6
3-1 Propagate network objects or object zones between topology classification or zone modes ........ 3-6
4 Topology objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxiii
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use object zone
9-1 Display and manage counter properties and descriptions ........................................................................ 9-46
9-2 Display and manage indicator properties and descriptions ...................................................................... 9-53
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-4 Create busy hour reference indicator ............................................................................................................... 9-64
10 Manage parameters
13 Use rules
14 Use events
17 Use favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-2 Add a function to favorite functions ................................................................................................................ 17-4
18 Views
19 Reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 MultiNET Mode
21 POD mode
22 Diagnosis
23 Tuning
24 Cartography
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxvii
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-6 Manage frequency re-use ................................................................................................................................... 24-93
25 Alerters
26 User preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Preface
Preface
Purpose
This guide describes how to use the Network Performance Optimizer (NPO) in order to
view and manage counter and indicator values for various network objects, and to know
how to monitor and optimize the radio network.
For information about NPO administration procedures, refer to the NPO Administration
User Guide and NPO Platform User Guide.
Document pertinence
This document applies to the NPO M4.1 projects.
Audience
This guide is intended for engineers responsible for the day-to-day optimization of the
network.
Assumed knowledge
You must have a basic understanding of the Alcatel-Lucent operations and maintenance
concepts for the BSS and RNS.
Product names
This document uses the following NPO naming convention: 9959 NPO and the generic
term NPO refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 9959 Network Performance Optimizer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary xxix
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Preface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to comment
To comment on this document or indicate an error, please contact your customer
representative.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
1 Introduction to NPO
1
Overview
Purpose
This section provides an overview of NPO functions and features, and introduces current
terminology.
Contents
Terminology 1-1
NPO presentation 1-6
NPO user interface 1-6
NPO functions 1-9
NPO advanced optimization features 1-13
Terminology
This document uses the following terms.
Term Description
Alerter Based on the reported Performance Measurement data, alerters are defined to
detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms in the OMC-R.
Availabil- This defines the availability of counters, indicators, parameters, view templates,
ity and report templates both spatially and temporally.
Domain The availability domain of a view template is the intersection of the indicators' or
parameters' availability domain used in the view template. The view templates that
are displayed in the mode RNC, for example, mean that the RNC is in the
availability domain for the view template.
The availability domain of a report template is the intersection of the contained
view templates' availability domain used in the report template. The report
templates that are displayed in the mode RNC, for example, mean that the RNC is
in the availability domain for the report template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO Terminology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Classifica- A classification defines how a set of objects are classified using some criteria. The
tion result of a classification applied to a set of objects is a tree structure in which the
objects are the leaves, and the classification criteria are the nodes.
A classification can be applied to Network Objects (Topology Classification),
Object Zones (Zone Classification), and Functions (Function Classification).
Typical classifications are:
All (all objects)
Topo (all objects classified according to topologic relations between them).
LAC (all objects classified according to their LAC attribute)
etc.
Execution The execution context contains what is required to obtain the indicator or counter
Context values on a set of network objects, for example:
Periodicity (Raw, Hour, Day, Week, Month, 5 Minutes, 1/4 Hour, 1/2 Hour,
busy hours, Trend choices (hours of day, hours of week, days of week, and
days of month), 2 Hours, 3 Hours, 4 Hours, 6 Hours, 8 Hours.)
Time interval
Sampling
Interpolation
Reliability options.
When referring to the execution context, the spatial scope itself (set of network
objects) is not included.
The execution context is used when creating views and reports.
Comment A comment zone is an area of text that may be entered in a report template and is
Zone therefore displayed in an executed report.
Comment zones are not mandatory. They may be interleaved with the view
templates in the report template.
Design Parameters that define the radio network architecture in term of coverage and
Parameters mobility capability.
Diagnosis Diagnosis scenarios provide information on the possible causes of a QoS problem
Scenario and suggest ways to solve it.
The result of the diagnosis appears in the executed view or as an .html file.
The following modes apply:
Detailed mode
When executed in detailed mode, the diagnosis scenario report contains a
precise reporting execution description for each node of the scenario.
Synthetic mode
When executed in Synthetic mode, the diagnosis report contains a synthetic
status associated with a description string for the whole scenario. The
execution process is stopped at the first for the first error encountered.
Tuning mode
The diagnosis can be triggered for checking the Tuning Session.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO Terminology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Events Events are historical network configuration data which keep track of logical /
design parameter modifications and / or topology modifications.
Filter In a topology or function classification, a filter is a set of criteria that can be
applied on top of the classification. It allows hiding of objects that do not match
the filtering criteria in the classification.
In a view, whether on its own or in a report, filtering allows hiding of tabular data
based on user defined criteria.
Function A function is the generic term used to refer to individual objects of a data group or
analysis service class.
Depending on the considered domain, a function is:
A counter
An indicator
A design / logical parameter
An event
A rule
A synthetic diagnosis
A view template or a report template.
Function A function tree is a tree in a mode displaying: counters, indicators, parameters,
Tree events, rules, synthetic diagnosis, view templates or report templates.
Mode A Mode is characterized by:
An Object Type
A list of available topology classifications for the objects of that type
A list of available data / functions applicable to these objects.
Typical modes for GSM are:
BSC
Cell
Adjacency
TRX
Traffic Zone.
Typical modes for W-CDMA are:
RNC
Cell
Adjacency.
Typical modes for LTE are:
eNodeB
Cell.
Depending on the selected mode, the user has a specific list of available topology
classifications and functions.
All available modes are grouped in the Mode Manager.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO Terminology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Hardware Collection of hardware and firmware information of the network elements, coming
Inventory from the associated OMC-Rs.
Logical Parameters that permit the telecom behavior optimization. They are also called
Parameters telecom algorithm parameters.
Network A Network Object is the generic term used to refer to individual topology objects
Object such as:
A cell
An RNC
BSS
BSC
BTS
eNodeB
Adjacency
TRX.
Object An Object Zone refers to the logical topology objects that allow the manipulation
Zone of a set of network objects as a single topology object.
The Global Object Zone is defined with no criteria and allows visualization of the
entire Working Zone.
QoS QoS Counters are used as building blocks in the formation of QoS Indicators.
Counter
QoS An Optimization Application view used to track the quality of service in a radio
Indicator network.
It is computed from Performance Measurements / Counters values, other
indicators, or any other available network parameters values (e.g.: radio
parameters).
Reference Excel files that express the default value that a parameter for a given network
Values object should have.
Report A report displays the results coming from indicators or parameters in view
templates, in a tabular or graphical way.
A report contains the network objects, views, comment zones, and an.
A report is also known as an executed report and appears in the report viewer.
Report A report template describes a sequence of graphical representations of QoS
Template indicator or parameter values.
A report template is mainly composed of one or more view templates and
comment zones.
The report template is used when building a report.
A report template is composed of view templates, as a report is composed of
views.
Rules Excel files that express the dependency between two or more parameters of a
given object, and are stored in the Oracle database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO Terminology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Description
Topology A topology tree is a tree displaying network objects.
Tree
Tuning Tuning is a preparation mode consisting of a significant set of modifications
required to correct misbehaviors of the network or to enhance its quality of
service.
A Tuning Session contains Tuning Operations such as parameter modifications or
topology changes.
A Tuning Session can be applied whenever necessary. All Tuning Operations are
then be forwarded to the concerned OMC-Rs. All these operations have to be
considered as recommendations sent to the OMC-R operator(s).
View A view displays the results coming from counters, indicators or parameters, in a
tabular or graphical way.
A view contains the network objects, functions, and (period, interval, sampling,
interpolation, reliability options).
View A view template is a formal description of a graphical representation of QoS
Template indicator or parameter values, depending on the type of view template.
The view template is used when building a view.
As a report template is composed of view templates, a report is composed of
views.
Working A Working Zone is a set of criteria applied on the entire network to compute the
Zone sub-network that appears in the Analysis Desktop.
The Global Working Zone is defined with no criteria and allows visualizing the
entire network.
This subset of cells can be:
Global: All the objects in the database are accessible
User-defined: Using the Working Zone Manager, you define the cells that are
accessible within a particular Working Zone.
You can open only one Working Zone at a time on your workstation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO presentation
The NPO offers a full range of multi-standard QoS Monitoring and radio network
optimization facilities:
Powerful Graphical User Interface supporting all efficient use of the NPO functions
QoS analysis
QoS decrease cause diagnosis
Radio resource configuration tuning
Cartographic telecom management
Manage hardware inventory
Customizing.
It includes the multi-standard version of the previous products deployed in Alcatel-Lucent
networks:
RNO
NPA
LASER.
The NPO supports GSM, W-CDMA, LTE and WiMAX Radio Access Networks.
This product includes a powerful Oracle database containing performance measurements
and calculated indicators. Based on the database, the detection of QoS degradation is
much faster, as the NPO also proposes the appropriate correction tasks and an improved
logical configuration for the radio network, even in multi-standard environments.
Performance measurements ensure:
Efficient planning and optimization of the network
Efficient optimization of the network
Usage statistics
Detailed investigation of a past problem
Realtime analysis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO user interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the main Man-Machine Interface (MMI) window, the QoS
analysis desktop.
The user interface is based on an object-oriented design, whereby all actions are
accessible through contextual menus. Depending on the selected object(s), only the
relevant commands are provided. Most operations can be performed through the drag and
drop mechanism or with the help of menu bars and tool bars.
The main NPO user interface (analysis desktop) is composed of the following five areas.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO user interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The classification can be done, for example, by:
LAC
Hardware topology
Cell type
Routing area (for GPRS).
View browser
The view browser is the target place for drag and drop of one or more network resources
and one or more functions.
It contains views that are used to display values of logical / design parameters, indicators,
and counters.
The displayed data in the view can be exported to Excel for further analysis.
Two mode forms are available:
Tabular
Graphic.
Report browser
The report browser is the target place for drag and drop of one or more network resources
and one or more views.
A report is composed of several views, each displaying a set of defined indicators or
parameters for a user defined report period.
Data displayed in the report can be exported to Excel for further analysis.
Tuning browser
The tuning components offer services to create, edit, and apply tuning sessions on tunable
systems (OMC-Rs). A Tuning Session is a set of changes (object / parameters /
adjacencies / frequency creation, update or deletion) that can be created, updated and
applied.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO user interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cartography browser
The geographical representation capability is a complement to the tree gadgets
representation. GSM cells, W-CDMA cells, LTE cells, BTSs, NodeBs, BSCs, RNCs,
MSCs, OMC-Rs, eNodeBs, or adjacencies are displayed with geographical maps in the
background, in order to display the location of the network elements, the sectoring, the
type and the status of cells at a glance. This geographical representation offers zooming
facilities and searching facilities (by dragging and dropping objects from tree gadges
representations).
NPO functions
The NPO enables you to optimize the following functions.
QoS analysis
The NPO collects periodical measurements of the radio traffic, radio resource usage, and
handover behavior from the network elements through the declared OMC-Rs. These
measurements serve the quality of service monitoring at the NPO, and back-office
activities such as network optimization and network planning.
The permanent, network-wide QoS monitoring relies on the regular collection of the same
performance counters on all managed Network Elements.
Raw measurements are stored in the NPO database. Based on raw measurements,
indicators are calculated and stored for up to two years. These indicators are consolidated
in daily, weekly, and monthly values, and can be additionally consolidated on a group of
Network Elements. The indicators correspond to high level information which can be
directly managed by the operator and are defined by Alcatel-Lucent.
The user can select and launch any predefined or user-defined QoS report. the NPO
provides a powerful dynamic graphical user interface that eases QoS report analysis. For
specific needs where the provided standard indicators are not appropriate, the operator
can define via an Indicator Manager its own indicators called Customer Indicators.
The NPO operator can display the results in the form of reports containing both tables and
graphs (several indicators graphically displayed simultaneously). The customer can also
customize reports, for an easier adaptation to operator needs.
Special functions allow identification of the worst or best cells related to a QoS indicator,
to get reports on the QoS evolution, and to compare the service quality of different cells.
Comparing QoS indicator values with predefined thresholds, the NPO ensures rapid
verification of the quality of service in each single cell.
Reference values
Reference values are the recommended values of parameters. They allow a quick audit of
the network and allow the operator to detect which objects are not following
recommendations for parameter values. The reference values for a parameter depend on
different criteria, such as cell type, cell class, frequency, and BTS type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO is delivered with a default set of reference values, which can be customized to fit the
operator's needs.
Events
Events show when key information of a parameter (identifier, BSC, frequency) or
topology (eg. Move BTS) changes, based on the QoS evolution of the network.
The NPO is delivered with a default set of events.
Note: For W-CDMA, only the following events are available:
Cell
Adjacency
Network element creation / deletion.
For LTE, the events are not available.
Configuration parameters
The configuration function is used to verify the operational logical parameter settings.
This is done by comparing the operational values with the reference values.
Additionally, the operational cell design is verified by comparison with the planned
design. In order to follow the evolution of the logical parameter settings, the imported
operational values are stored in the NPO database. Appropriate reports can be requested at
any time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tuning
After a network optimization session is completed, a radio parameter tuning is performed
using the NPO. This is done in order to correct the network misbehavior and uses
functions of monitoring, checking, and diagnosis. The NPO user can prepare radio
resource configuration modifications, frequency changes and neighborhood modification
and apply them through the managed OMC-Rs.
Cartography
The cartography module allows the user to show the location of the network elements, the
sectoring, the type and the status of cells at a glance. It displays cells, adjacencies, BTSs,
BSCs and eNodeBs with geographical maps in the background, coming from RNP. The
integrated cartography editor offers zooming, highlighting, searching, and exporting
facilities.
Contextual menus on cells allow a quick identification of interfered cells, serving cell
area, neighborhood, etc. Finally, it is possible to choose any group of cells in the
geographical representation and show them selected in the different tree gadgets. NPO
geographical representation supports standard vector formats.
Customizing
In order to allow immediate use of the NPO, all adaptable values are set with default
values provided by Alcatel-Lucent at delivery. The operator must perform the
customization, as specific access rights are required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can customize the following values:
User defined QoS indicators
NPO users can create their own indicators when required.
QoS indicator thresholds
The user can define three alert thresholds corresponding to three QoS requirement
levels, for each QoS indicator.
Views
A view is an arrangement of consistent graphs and tables for a set of QoS indicators,
parameters, and other functions.
The following four types of views are defined: standard, vector, and matrix and
equipment.
Apart from the specific case of Equipment, views can also be grouped into four types
of evolution and comparison:
Mono-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Comparison View
Mono-Object Distribution View.
Reports
A report is composed of one or several views, and enables the user to display results
coming from QoS indicators, parameters, and other functions in view templates.
NPO provides the five types of reports:
Mono-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Comparison Report
Mono-Object Distribution Report
Warning Report.
Working zones
A Working Zone defines an area on which an optimizer performs his network
optimization activities (network resource filter).
Object zones
An object zone is a user-defined filter that works on the current Working Zone.
Topology classifications
The topology classification defines how network objects are classified in a tree
structure, depending on the selected mode. It is dependant on used technology.
Function classifications
The function classification defines how functions are classified in a tree structure. It is
not dependant on the used technology.
Free field definitions
Free fields are attributes that can be defined on any topology objects (such as cells,
BSCs, RNCs). Sorting and filtering capabilities can then be used to take advantage of
the information provided by these fields.
Parameter reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The reference value of a logical parameter is the one recommended by the
optimization expert.
Parameter checking rules
A parameter checking rule expresses the functional dependency between a set of
parameters of objects like cell, BSS or adjacent cells.
Diagnosis scenarios
A diagnosis scenario is an analysis tree that contains ways to investigate a quality of
service problem using the data available in NPO. Scenarios can be system or user
defined.
Alerters
Alerters are defined to detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms in the OMC-R,
on the basis of reported Performance Measurement data, then automatically loaded
inside the NPO. They are calculated from indicators.
Working zones
Working zones facilitate the work on a specific set of network objects and functions. They
are sub-network definitions, to assist the operator, who can only work in some Working
Zones.
When starting the Analysis Desktop, the user selects the preferred Working Zone to work
with and only sees the objects from this Working Zone.
To define a Working Zone, a set of criteria on base objects (for example, cells) is provided
and other accessible objects are deduced from this basic set of objects.
The Global Working Zone is a Working Zone with no filter that contains all objects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO advanced optimization features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QoS and resource unavailability correlation
Note: This section is not available for W-CDMA.
When a cell has a bad QoS (for example, because of congestion), it is important for the
optimizer to know if this bad QoS is due to a pure radio problem, or to a hardware failure
or maintenance action that led to the unavailability of the corresponding equipment. For
example, if a cell with four TRX had two of the four TREs out of service during the day,
there is a strong probability that there was some congestion during this period.
LASER calculates unavailability indicators based on information collected from the
managed OMC-Rs, which are then imported into the NPO. Each indicator reflects the
availability percentage of the corresponding resource (for example, cell or TRX). The
operator can display these indicators or use them as an optional filter for warning reports
(for example, to display the 20 worst cells of the Working Zone, in terms of congestion,
and having an unavailability less than 5% during the day).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO advanced optimization features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User defined thematic layers
The thematic layer is a feature that allows the user to visualize QoS information on the
geographical representation. It colors parts of the geographical representation, according
to user requests on the QoS indicators, parameter values, analysis results, etc.
The NPO provides a thematic layer editor where each operator is free to enter his own
requests and the associated colors depending on the results. The product is delivered with
some default layers like traffic distribution or frequency reusing.
The results are mapped on cell contours (when analysis is done on cells) to provide a
good representation, even at low zoom level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 1-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Introduction to NPO NPO advanced optimization features
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
2 2 etting started with
G
Analysis Desktop
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to initialize and perform simple tasks using the Analysis
Desktop main window.
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-1: Initialize Analysis Desktop first time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate Working Zone (global or user defined) and then click on Open.
Result: The default standard, mode, topology classification and function classification
appear for the selected Working Zone.
The topology and function trees are created, but only the first level trees are visible.
The QoS requirement is set as that of the Working Zone.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-2: Initialize Analysis Desktop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Initialize the last selected Working Zone Yes
The last accessed standard, mode, topology classification
and function classification are loaded for the selected
Working Zone, with everything that the user accessed the
last time.
However, only the first level function and topology trees are
displayed.
Open the Select Working Zone window No
Result: The Working Zone is initialized or the Select Working Zone window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-3: Exit Analysis Desktop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To Click on
Exit the Analysis Desktop without saving the information and Yes
close all opened object editors
Keep program open and save or close views / reports and / or No
object editors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function Displays
Mode Browser -> Topology Network Objects
Classification Browser Functions
Mode Browser -> Function
Classification Browser
Executed View Browser Executed Views
The executed view browser can contain:
One or more network objects
One or more counters / indicators / view
templates / parameters (design or logical) / rules /
events / free fields / diagnosis.
Executed Report Browser Executed Reports
The executed report browser can contain:
One or more network objects
One or more view templates / report templates.
Cartography Browser Cartography Information, containing three main
regions:
Tool bar
View port
Minimap.
The cartography browser contains:
A viewport with the geographical representation
of the evaluated zone containing several network
objects
The Layer Manager with a list of layers and
sub-layers.
Tuning Browser Tuning Sessions
The tuning browser can contain:
One or more tuning sessions
One or more tuning jobs
Synthesis table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function Displays
Detailed Diagnosis Browser Detailed Diagnosis Scenario Execution.
The Detailed Diagnosis Report browser contains test
nodes grouped in trees, giving information on the
possible cause of a detected QoS problem, and
offering hyperlinks to see the Python node code.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE
WiMAX.
When one standard is selected, the tab is highlighted. This is called the active standard.
Arrow buttons are available for accessing all standards if they are not visible due to the
width of the standard browser.
Each standard tab has a set of modes. When one mode is selected, it is highlighted. This is
called the active mode.
According to the selected mode, the list of displayed counters / indicators / parameters /
reports / views is not the same. It is filtered according to the availability domain.
The default display for the modes for GSM is the tabular mode.
The default display for the modes for W-CDMA and LTE is the tree.
For multi-standard, the default mode is the tree.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The mode tree displays all modes that can be classified using hierarchical relations
between them (i.e. to put all modes corresponding to sub-objects of Cell3G below the
mode of Cell3G).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Free Fields are displayed in alphabetic order and no user-defined classification can be
created for them.
No icon is associated with the free field.
Diagnosis Scenarios
Diagnoses are displayed classified by their family and sub-families properties.
One Diagnosis can be associated with more than one family / sub-family and thus be
displayed more than once.
Rules
Rules are displayed classified by their family and sub-families properties.
One Rule can be associated with more than one family / sub-family and thus be
displayed more than once.
Thematics
THL are displayed classified by their family and sub-families properties.
One THL can be associated with more than one family / sub-family and thus be
displayed more than once.
Tuning
Tuning classification contains Tuning Operations. Most of the Tuning Operations are
leaves and can be dragged and dropped in a Tuning Session.
Tuning Operations are sorted by alphabetical order and Parameters are displayed
classified by their family and sub-families properties under a Standard node. Only
Parameters for which the Visible property is set to True and that are tagged as being
Tunable are displayed.
Events
Events are displayed classified by standard.
Cartography browser
The cartography browser contains:
A viewport with the geographical representation of the evaluated zone containing
several network objects
The Layer Manager with a list of layers and sub-layers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Detailed diagnosis report browser
The Detailed Diagnosis Report browser contains test nodes grouped in trees, giving
information on the possible cause of a detected QoS problem, and offering hyperlinks to
see the Python node code.
Tuning browser
The tuning browser can contain:
One or more tuning sessions
One or more tuning jobs
Synthesis table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 2-4.2: Organize modes in standards and modes browser (p. 2-18).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Procedure 2-4.3: Hide mode in standards and modes browser (p. 2-21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 2-4.4: Refresh mode in standards and modes browser (p. 2-22).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4: Use standards, modes, topology and
function classifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.1: Collapse all in topology classification
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the Collapse all option to go back to the first level visible nodes and close
everything.
Result: The tree nodes are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.2: Organize modes in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Organize Modes window also opens in tree mode, displaying the available
modes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.2: Organize modes in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Hide a mode Perform the following steps:
1. Deselect or select the required mode and
click on Hide.
The following confirmation message
appears:
Deselected Mode and its
Topology Classifications and
functions will also be hidden
2. Click on Yes.
Move a mode one position higher Select the required mode and click on
Move Up.
Move a mode one position lower Select the required mode and click on
Move Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.2: Organize modes in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Show a mode Click on Show.
3 Click on OK.
Result: The following message appears:
Are you sure you want to see the changes in the modes?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The mode changes are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.3: Hide mode in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected mode and its corresponding topology classification and data trees
are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.4: Refresh mode in standards and modes
browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.5: Organize topology classification trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.5: Organize topology classification trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Hide a classification Perform the following steps:
1. Deselect or select the classification and
click on Hide.
The following confirmation message
appears.
Deselected Topology
Classifications will be hidden.
2. Click on Yes.
Move a classification one position higher Select the classification and click on Move Up.
Move a classification one position lower Select the classification and click on
Move Down.
Show a classification Click on Show.
3 Click on OK.
Result: The following message appears:
Are you sure you want to see the changes in the topology
classifications?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The classification changes are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.6: Hide topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected topology classification are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.7: Refresh topology tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.8: Collapse all in topology browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the Collapse all option to go back to the first level visible nodes and close
everything.
Result: The tree nodes are hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.9: Apply filter on topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.10: Organize function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.10: Organize function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Hide a mode Perform the following steps:
1. De-select or select the mode and click on
Hide.
The following confirmation message
appears.
Deselected Data Trees will be
hidden.
2. Click on Yes.
Move a mode one position higher Select the mode and click on Move Up.
Move a mode one position lower Select the mode and click on Move Down.
Show a mode Click on Show.
3 Click on OK.
Result: The following message appears:
Are you sure you want to see the changes in the data trees?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The function tree changes are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.11: Hide function tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected function tree is hidden.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.12: Refresh function tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If required, select another function tree and then select Refresh Tree.
Result: The selected function tree is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-4.13: Collapse all function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Select
Display design / logical parameters, counters, Family / Sub-Family
indicators, views, reports, tuning, events, free
fields
Display reports, diagnosis scenarios, rules Type
Display indicators, views, reports Type / Family / Sub-Family
Display all functions, if customer function <Customer Defined>
classifications are created; see Procedure 7-2:
Create function classification (p. 7-3).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Customize analysis desktop
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resizing
A horizontal splitter separates the Mode browser and Executed View browser; and a
vertical splitter separates the Mode browser and Executed Report browser. The browsers
can be re-sized and the splitters act as partitions (see Layout user preferences
(p. 26-13)).
Visibility management
If a Sub-Family is not defined, then the function object appears under the Family. If a
Family is not defined, then the function object is invisible and can only be seen by the
Administrator and its owner at the root level.
Visibility management for objects in the modes and functions browser takes into
consideration the following factors:
When an object has no family, it is only visible to the Administrator and its owner in
the editors, not in the Analysis Desktop tree (except concerning working zone)
When an object has a family, it is visible only if the Visible flag is set to true
When an operator removes the family associated with an object, the Visible flag is
automatically set to false and cannot be changed until a new family is reentered
When an operator associates a family with an object, the Visible flag is automatically
set to true but can then be changed before being saved
For System objects, only the Administrator can change the Visible property.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-5: Reorganize standards, modes, topology
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Hide the selected technology Click on Hide.
Move the selected technology Select the technology and click on Move Up.
Move the selected technology Select the technology and click on
Move Down.
Show the selected technology Click on Show.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-35
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use tool tips
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 Tool tip example 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-36 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can either use the drag and drop facility or the menu tool bar to display the values of
indicators / counters / parameters / views / reports.
Use Action
Drag and drop Into the Executed View / Report browser
Select from the menu tool bar, as appropriate Select one of the following options:
View -> Execute View... for indicators /
counters / parameters / views
Report -> Execute Report... for reports.
Press Select one of the following options:
Ctrl+Q, for indicators / counters /
parameters / views
Ctrl+Shift+R, for reports.
3 Click on OK.
Result: The functions browser values are displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-37
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-6: Display functions browser values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
View templates, report templates and indicators
To View Do
View templates Perform the following steps:
1. Select the appropriate view.
2. Right click and select View Template OR
select Data-> View Template from the
tool bar OR press CTRL+E.
The View Template Editor window opens,
displaying the properties of the selected view
template.
Report templates Perform the following steps:
1. Select the appropriate view.
2. Right click and select Report Template
OR select Data-> Report Template from
the tool bar OR press CTRL+R.
The Report Template Editor window opens,
displaying the properties of the selected report
template.
Indicators Perform the following steps:
1. Select the appropriate view.
2. Right click and select Indicator... OR
select Data-> Indicators... from the tool
bar OR press Ctrl+N.
The Indicator Editor window opens,
displaying the properties of the selected
indicator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-38 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Create and execute reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The user may choose to:
Procedure 19-2: Execute reports (p. 19-30), OR
Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60).
After their execution, the reports are made available in a repository.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-39
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-7: Diagnose QoS problems
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-40 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use cartography management functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-41
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage network stability, availability and alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-42 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use remote inventory data management (RIDM)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The automatic collection of hardware inventory is available for 9100 BTS, 9130 BSC
Evolution, all types of MFS, and for TC supervised from OMC-R. All of these types of
equipment provide inventory data for all the active boards, for racks and some support
equipments (fans, power supplies). Elements such as cables and plugs are not part of the
inventory.
Hardware inventory data can be imported automatically or on demand. For more
information, refer to Miscellaneous import tasks, to Load Inventory, in the NPO
Administration User Guide document.
Refer to Remote Inventory Data Management in the NPO Remote Inventory User Guide
document, for information on how to view NE boards, end of warranty, boards in CAL or
not in CAL.
The online help documentation appears. The information is shown in html format,
including hyperlinks to allow easy browsing between related domains.
If the Online help browser is already open, its content is updated with the newly requested
documentation.
The operator can use the back / next navigation facilities to navigate through the history
of the displayed help pages. Back is allowed only when at least two different pages were
displayed. Next is allowed only after at least one back action was triggered.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-43
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Access online help
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-44 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Use tip of the day
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Display the next available tip Click on Next Tip
Display the previously displayed tip Click on Previous Tip
Disable the display of tips at Analysis Desktop Deselect the Show Tips on Startup check box
startup
The default option is as set in the Display tips on startup in the user preferences.
Manage licensing
During the Analysis Desktop start up, the application checks to see if there are temporary
licenses that are due to expire soon.
If there is at least one temporary license that will expire in less than X days, (X is a
configurable value), a warning message appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-45
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage licensing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives the list of licensed features available with the NPO.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-46 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage licensing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-47
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage licensing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-48 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage licensing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view the installed licenses, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Display list of installed license.
To install a new license, refer to the NPO Platform User Guide document, to Activate
New License.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-49
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-50 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-8: Manage notifications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The window closes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manage tokens
The Token Management system limits the number of clients running simultaneously. If
there is an inactive client, its token is automatically released and becomes available for
another client. When a client loses its token due to an inactivity period, it is possible to
retrieve a token (if there is any available) and continue to work as usual.
With this feature, it is possible to have a number of clients running on a HMI server
bigger than the maximum number of allowed users, because some clients can be
considered as inactive.
Token request
When the Analysis Desktop is started, it requests for a token from the server. The server
returns the token to the client.
If there is no token available, an error message appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-51
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage tokens
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Token refresh
When the Analysis Desktop is running, it refreshes the token every five minutes by
sending a request to the server. If the server does not receive any request for the token
from the Analysis Desktop for more than five minutes, then the token is released in the
server.
If there is no token available when a refresh request is received, the server sends an error
message.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-52 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Manage tokens
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This message indicates that the Token will be released in <remaining time>, when
<remaining time> is updated every 5 seconds until 0 is reached.
You can keep the current token by clicking on Keep Token.
If you are still inactive during this time, an error message appears.
This message indicates that the Token was released following a <inactivity_period-
_value>.
You can:
Exit from the application after confirmation and any unsaved work will be lost, by
clicking on Exit, OR
Try again to retrieve a token if one was released by someone else, by clicking on
Retrieve Token.
A new request is sent to the server, and depending on the answer:
If there is one token available, then the user can continue the session
If not, the No Token is available error message appears, and you can
exit from the Analysis Desktop or retry the operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-53
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click in the Analysis Desktop menu bar on the Consolidation Follow Up icon.
The color codes of the Consolidation Follow Up icon are displayed in the following table.
Column Description
Date of the consolidation Displays a list of dates for the consolidation.
Status Status:
OK when the consolidation was
successful
Not performed
Failed
Ongoing.
Last performed step, for example: This information appears only if the status of
RR / HR Transfer that consolidation is Failed or Ongoing.
Normalization
Recovered data: Yes means that since the consolidation, new
Yes data is loaded (is present in RR tables) and
No so a recovery consolidation can be launched
in order to take it into account.
No means that no data is loaded since the
consolidation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-54 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column Description
An action hyperlink: There is no action hyperlink if the status is
Recover / Consolidate. OK or Not performed and the Recovered
Data is No, or if there is at least one
Ongoing consolidation for another
displayed day.
Details Contains an Detail hyperlink only in case
the associated Action button is Recover.
For all the other Action values, the column
value is empty.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-55
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-10: Select / deselect all items
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To deselect all selected items, select Edit -> Deselect All from the tool bar menu.
Result: All the required items are deselected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-56 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Find text box, type the name of the object to find and click on Enter.
Note: Only tree items equals exactly to the entered string are retained (together with
their hierarchy/children).
If you want to display objects starting or ending or containing a given string, you must
use the following wildcards:
*: Any multiple characters (including zero character)
?: Any single character.
Result: If any matching object of the complete tree is found, it is displayed in the tree.
Note:
If a leaf node matches the filtering string, it is kept with its hierarchy (if any).
If a non leaf node matches the filtering string, it is kept with all its children as well as
its hierarchy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 2-57
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Getting started with Analysis Desktop Procedure 2-11: String based tree filtering
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-58 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
3 3unctional window
F
common tasks
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the common tasks in the functional windows.
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Drag and drop objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table describes the objects which can be dragged and dropped in the
different views.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Drag and drop objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Drag and drop objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Drag and drop objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: To change the drag and drop, modify, add or remove, refer to Procedure 26-1:
Configure user preferences (p. 26-2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-1: Propagate network objects or object zones
between topology classification or zone modes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected network object / object zone and drop it to a different zone mode or
topology classification.
During the dragging process, if the mode or classification are incompatible with the
selected network object / object zone, the mouse pointer changes to .
Continue the dragging process to an appropriate mode / classification, where the mouse
pointer is .
Result: The selected network object / object zone is successfully relocated.
Depending on how the Display time before a tab is raised and made active
parameter is set as a user preference, the target mode or target classification, with the
highlighted propagated network object or object zone:
Is automatically displayed, OR
You have to switch to the target mode / classification to view it.
The view is auto-scrolled until the first selected object is visible.
Note: If a filter is applied on the target classification, some dropped objects may not
be visible. In this case, a message appears and you must either choose to remove the
current filter (i.e. switch to No Filter), or to drop it.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
To display the properties Right click on the network object / counter / indicator /
design parameter / logical parameter / report / view,
then select Properties... from the popup menu, OR
Double click on the item whose properties to view.
To view the properties of an item in Select the item, then select Topology -> Properties...
the topology classification from the tool bar, OR
Select the item, then press Alt+Enter.
To view the properties of a counter / Select the item, then select Data -> Properties... from
indicator / design parameter / logical the tool bar.
parameter / report / view:
Select the item, then press Ctrl+P.
2 To keep a copy of the Properties window and display several on screen at the same time,
use the Snapshot feature.
Click on .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-2: Display and edit properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The selected windows remain on screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Edit the properties Perform the following steps:
1. In the Properties window, click on Edit.
The specific editor opens with the
corresponding template displayed.
2. Click on .
3. Perform the appropriate changes, then
save by clicking on .
4. Close the template by clicking on Close.
To view the results of the edit, reselect the
object, right click and select Properties.
View the previous object in the same category Click on
View the next object in the same category Click on
View the previous page in the same category Click on
View the next page in the same category Click on
Close the window Click on Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-3: Copy URL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-3: Copy URL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Use generic editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic editor panels
Panel Options
Object Selection tree The left panel displays all the objects,
irrespective of the mode, sorted as in the
Function browser.
You can perform the following functions
within the object selection tree:
Copy
Edit
Delete
Find
Refresh
Right click on an item and select Refresh.
The entire tree is refreshed.
When selecting an item on the left panel, its
properties are displayed in the middle panel.
If there is an ongoing creation or edition, the
items on the left panel are greyed.
A filtering function is present at the top of the
panel, refer to Procedure 2-11: String based
tree filtering (p. 2-57).
Properties panel The middle panel is the working area for the
object editor. This is where the displaying,
creation and updates are performed.
Refer to the specific section for information
about each kind of object.
Functions from the right frame can be dropped
in the Properties panel.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Use generic editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Panel Options
Sub-Object Selection tree The right panel contains a set of function trees
to fill the object editor fields.
Sub-objects can be dragged and dropped in the
properties panel.
The sub-object selection list is filtered
according to the objects that can be used in the
object editor. For example, if a Mono Object
distribution report is being created, then only
vector and matrix view templates are
displayed in the sub-object selection list.
You can perform the following functions
within the sub-object selection tree:
Drag items to the middle working area
View properties
Right click on an item and select
Properties.
The Properties window for the selected
object opens.
Refresh
Right click on an item and select Refresh.
The entire tree is refreshed.
Collapse all
Right click on an item and select Collapse
all. This option allow you to go back to the
first level nodes visible and everything is
closed.
Find
A filtering function is present at the top of the
panel, refer to Procedure 2-11: String based
tree filtering (p. 2-57).
Splitters The left splitter is used to adjust the object
selection tree size.
The right splitter is used to adjust the
sub-object selection tree size.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Use generic editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic editor buttons
Depending on the allowed operations, the buttons on the tool bar are activated or grayed
dynamically.
Button Description
Creates a new template.
The user becomes the owner of the new
template.
Copies selected item to a new one.
The user becomes the owner of the new
template. The template properties window is
filled with the pre-defined values.
Launches the editor mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Refresh
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refresh
Select one of the following options.
To refresh Do
All the functions of the Analysis Desktop From the tool bar, select Edit -> Refresh -> All
or press F5.
All topology and function trees of the selected From the tool bar, select Edit -> Refresh ->
mode Active Mode.
Only the selected topology / function tree From the tool bar, select Topology -> Refresh
Active Tree.
It is only for the topology case.
From the tool bar, select Data -> Refresh
Active Tree.
It is only for the function case.
Right click in the topology / function tree and
select Refresh Tree.
When a tree is refreshed, the tree remains with the structure opened as before the refresh
operation and on the same position (same selected objects), therefore the current selection
is kept (i.e. the objects that were selected before the refresh operation remain selected
after the refresh operation, if they are still present in the tree).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-4: Search
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Option Description
Match case If Match case is not checked, then the search
ignores case differences (eXaMple =
example).
Find whole words only If Find whole words only is checked, then
partial match is not considered a search result
(e.g. searching for cell does not find cell_12).
Use wildcards If Use wildcards is checked, then
* is interpreted as wildcard for any
number of unknown characters.
? is interpreted as wildcard for just one
unknown character.
If it is not checked, * and ? are interpreted as
standard characters, allowing their usage in
names of searches.
Include user note If Include user note is checked, then the
content of the user note is also searched while
exploring the tree.
Creation or Modification date of the user note,
as well as Owner of it is also checked when
the search is triggered.
Add to selection Enables to choose the behavior of the selection
when an element is found.
If Add to selection is checked, the found item
is added to the selection (instead of replacing
it).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-4: Search
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Option Description
Search order Down - the search is made then from the first
selected object to the end of the tree.
Up - the search is made from the first selected
object to the beginning of the tree.
All - the search is made from the beginning till
the end of the tree.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-4: Search
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note that the search is only performed in the active classification, and that no special
search limited to a sub-tree or to a sub-selection is required.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It automatically searches for the same string starting from the first selected object or from
the beginning of the tree if there is no selected object.
If any matching object is found, it is selected and the tree is automatically scrolled to
make it visible.
If there are no objects which match the search criteria, then a message appears stating that
the searched mode is not found.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execution context
When executing functions (view / report / diagnosis / rules / events / free fields / THL /
indicators / parameters) in the tabular/graphical viewer or in the report viewer, the
execution context information must be filled in.
The window comprises two tabs:
General
Options.
Periodicity
To define the granularity of the executed view / report / function, the periodicity must be
set.
Periodicity choices are dynamic and depend on the intersection of availability domain of
the objects (Counters / Indicators / Parameters) to be displayed. Depending on the
selected view / report / function(s), some periodicity units are grayed and are not
available for selection.
Free fields and events (when they are defined for the considered technology) are available
for day periodicity only.
The periodicity options are:
Hour
Day
Week
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Month
5 Minutes
1/4 Hour
1/2 Hour
Raw (available for counters only)
Busy Hour choices (indicators or fixed)
Trend choices (hours of day, hours of week, days of week, and days of month)
2 Hours
3 Hours
4 Hours
6 Hours
8 Hours.
This list may vary.
The following table shows the maximum storage duration for each periodicity.
The values are customized based on the technologies/hardware used during the NPO
installation. These values may also be configured using the process defined in Configure
indicator storage duration from NPO Administration Handbook document.
For diagnosis, less than Hour and Raw periodicities are not allowed.
For the equipment view, the available periodicities are H / D / W / M only.
Periodicity is not required in the case of a parameter (design or logical) with no historical
value requested, or in the case of an Equipment View of an alarm (only H / D / W / M are
accessible in this case).
No historical value requested is defined in user preferences, refer to Views / reports user
preferences (p. 26-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execute report options
In the case of report execution, two extra options are present in the General tab of the
Execution Context window: .
Option Description
Immediate Execution Use this option to execute the report immediately. In this case, fill
in the appropriate Date and hour (p. 3-21), and all necessary
fields from the Options tab.
To Be Scheduled Use this option to postpone the report execution to a later time. A
new panel with three tabs appears ( Date, General, Repeat), as
presented in the figure below.
Refer to Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60) for detailed information on how to
use these options.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The hour cannot be higher than the current hour -1 (except if the chosen hour equal to 0
o'clock). If the user enters an hour higher or equal to the current hour, the hour is
automatically set to the current hour - 1, if the hour is not equal to 0.
Dates are automatically normalized when selecting the OK button according to the
periodicity, as shown in the following tables.
Start Date and Time In the Execution Context dialog, the Start date and time are
decreased to the beginning of the first period (for the selected periodicity) of the
observation interval.
Periodicity Adjustment
5 Minutes 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 min.
1/4 Hour 0, 15, 30, or 45 min.
1/2 Hour 0 or 30 min
Hour The last completed hour before current time (now) if the
input start date and time are not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 Hours The first hour of the last completed 2/3/4/6/8-hour interval
before current time (now) if the input start date and time are
not completed (for considered periodicity), otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Day The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input start date is older than current day, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Week First day of the week (according to the system user
preferences) to which belongs the user input Start date if
this considered week is completed, otherwise the first day
of the last completed week before current day (now).
Month Day 1 of the month to which belongs the user input Start
date if this considered month is completed, otherwise the
first day of the last completed month before current day
(now).
Trend on hours of day The current day (today) if the input start date is not
completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Trend on hours of week The first day of current week if the input start date is not
completed, otherwise the first day of the week to which
belongs the input start date.
Trend on days of month The first day of current month if the input start date is not
completed, otherwise the first day of the month to which
belongs the input start date.
Busy Hour ('BH_xxx') The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input start date is not completed, otherwise no adjustment
needed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Periodicity Adjustment
Fixed Busy Hour The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input start date combined with the chosen Fixed Busy Hour
are not completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Raw The last completed minute before current time (now) if the
input start date and time is not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
End Date and Time In the Execution Context dialog, the End date and time are
decreased to the beginning of the last period (for the selected periodicity) of the
observation interval.
Periodicity Adjustment
5 Minutes 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55 min.
1/4 Hour 0, 15, 30, or 45 min.
1/2 Hour 0 or 30 min
Hour The last completed hour before current time (now) if the
input end date and time are not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 Hours The first hour of the 2/3/4/6/8-hour interval to which
belongs the user input End time (relatively to the Start time
and the considered periodicity) if this considered
2/3/4/6/8-hour interval is completed, otherwise the first
hour of the last completed 2/3/4/6/8-hour interval before
current time (now).
Day The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input end date is older than current day, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Week First day of the week (according to the system user
preferences) to which belongs the user input End date if this
considered week is completed, otherwise the first day of the
last completed week before current day (now).
Month Day 1 of the month to which belongs the user input End
date if this considered month is completed, otherwise the
first day of the last completed month before current day
(now).
Trend on hours of day The current day (today) if the input end date is not
completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Trend on hours of week The last day of current week if the input end date is not
completed, otherwise the last day of the week to which
belongs the input end date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Periodicity Adjustment
Trend on days of month The last day of current month if the input end date is not
completed, otherwise the last day of the month to which
belongs the input end date.
Busy Hour ('BH_xxx') The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input end date is not completed, otherwise no adjustment
needed.
Fixed Busy Hour The last completed day before current day (today) if the
input end date combined with the chosen Fixed Busy Hour
are not completed, otherwise no adjustment needed.
Raw The last completed minute before current time (now) if the
input end date and time is not completed, otherwise no
adjustment needed.
Based on the periodicity selection, the date appears in the following format.
Periodicity Format
1/4 Hour <date> <HH>:<MM>
1/2 Hour <date> <HH>:<MM>
Hour <date> <HH>:<MM>
Day <date>
Week <date>
Month <date>
The following table lists the default values for starting and ending dates.
To set the default start and end date and time values, click on Default Dates. Depending
on the periodicity, the following values are automatically filled.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trend periodicities
The following checks are made if a trend is selected:
For the trend on hours of day, the period must cover at least 1 day (24 hours)
For the trend on hours of week, the period must cover at least 1 week
For the trend on days of week, the period must cover at least 1 week
For the trend on days of month, the period must cover at least 1 month.
Trend on hours of day and trend on hours of week are available if the Hour period is also
available.
Trend on days of week and trend on days of month are available if the Day period is also
available.
The following table presents information on the trend calculation.
Periodicity Calculation
Trend on hours There are 24 columns from 00h, 01h, 02h,... 23h.
of day The value at hour n is the average for all selected day at hour n.
For example, value at 1AM is the average of the value at Monday 1AM,
Tuesday 1AM.
Trend on hours There are 7 * 24 columns.
of week The first column is the first day of the week (according to the system
preferences) followed by ' ' and then followed by HHh.
For example, if Monday is the first day of the week, then the columns start
and end as:
The value at hour n for day d is the average for all selected weeks at hour n
and day d.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1 Trend calculation (continued)
Periodicity Calculation
Trend on days The days of the week are displayed in seven columns
of week The first column is the first day of the week as defined in the system
preferences.
For example, if the first day of the week is Monday, then the columns are:
The value at day d is the average of the value at day d for all selected week.
For example, the value at Monday is the average of the value of Monday the
1st week and Monday the 2nd week.
Trend on days The days of the month are displayed as DD.
of month For example if the month of September is used, then the days are: 01, 02,
03,..., 30.
If, for example, the months of Sept Dec are used, then the days are: 01, 02,...,
30, 31.
The value of the n day, is the average of the value of the indicator at day n for
any selected month.
The trend calculation is not applied directly on the indicator formula, but on the stored
indicators (basic indicators) belonging to the formula.
For example an indicator I = A / B, where A and B are stored indicator, then a trend
calculation on the indicator I become trend(I) = avg(A) / Avg(B).
Note: The trend option takes into account only alarms loaded data. Null values are not
considered for trending calculations.
Spatial aggregation
When the Spatial checkbox is selected for Aggregation, then the spatial aggregation
method of each basic indicator is used.
This option can only be applied to standard indicators, it is not available neither for
parameters nor for counters.
This check box is disabled in the following cases:
For warning reports
For MultiNET mode and all modes containing object zones
If the view / report deals only with one object
If after an interactive modification, the execution context contains different type of
objects or object zones.
Refer to Display spatial aggregation in views / reports (p. 19-93) for detailed
information on how to use this option.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Temporal aggregation
When the Temporal check box is selected for Aggregation, the aggregation is performed
on the temporal axis.
This check box is disabled in the following cases:
For warning reports
For BH trends periodicities
For Static Trend prediction
For Zone modes, Traffic Zone and MultiNET mode
If the function does not contain at least one standard indicator.
QoS requirement
The values of QoS Requirement are Low, Medium, and High, as previously set as a user
preference.
This changes which values are highlighted in the view from the Legend, based on the
threshold values per QoS requirement set in the indicator definition.
Interpolation
Interpolation is used to automatically complete the missing values in the data warehouse.
You can either use the default interpolation on the QoS data, or select the first and second
interpolation methods from the displayed list.
Parameter Definition
None Only the existing values are used (no interpolation).
Linear The missing values are replaced by a linear interpolation between
the previous known value and the next known value.
The linear interpolation can be specific if the values before or
after are not known.
Only OK value When a display period is not fully available, a NULL value is
provided for that displayed period
Extend Only the existing values are used and they are extended to the
wanted displayed period
Zero All the missing periods are set to the zero value
Padding All the missing periods are set to a padding value. This is zero by
default, but can be configurable through the Padding parameter.
Interpolation is only required if there are indicators in the view and the Allow Dynamic
Interpolation user preference is true.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sampling
When Sampling is set and Upper_is_fault flag is set to FALSE for the sampling indicator
and the value of the sampling indicator is smaller than the sampling value defined in the
indicator, then values are displayed in gray.
In the other cases, values are displayed in their normal style.
Reliability
Note: This feature is not applicable for W-CDMA.
When Reliability is set, if the value of the reliability indicator is incorrect (not green), the
values are displayed in italic.
In the other cases, values are displayed in their normal style.
Note: The chosen values are stored as implicit user preferences. When the same
screen is reopened, these values are displayed as default one.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the Filter Options panel inside the Execution Context
window.
To define the family of the indicators defined in the list, update the qosUnAvailability-
Family parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/technologies/GSM/QoS/metadata/MaatQueryMetadata.xml
For LTE technology, update the qosUnAvailabilityFamily parameter from the following
file:
/alcatel/muse/technologies/LTE/QoS/metadata/MaatQueryMetadata.xml
QoS availability indicator
QoS Availability Indicators are used to filter objects based on the and the.
Select one value from the list that displays the Long Names (Reference Names) of the
indicators which are part of the System Parameter Filtering Unavailable Objects family,
defined in system user preferences for the network object on which the warning report is
being executed.
The implicit user preference keeps the last value used for this network object type. To
display it, click on .
If no value was defined in the system user preference, or the family does not exist, then
no indicators are shown and the filtering option is grayed.
Comparison operator
The following values are used as comparison operators:
>, <, =, <>, <=, >=
Select the appropriate operator from the list.
Threshold value
Type a real number for the Threshold Value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Event synthesis
Select Display Event Synthesis, to display the Event Synthesis in both tabular and
graphical modes for the given network object. This parameter is used in the case of a
Mono-Object evolution view with Day periodicity that contains only standard indicators
and / or parameters.
Click on Show Event Synthesis Options to view the list of available events.
From the Event Synthesis Options list, select the event type that composes the event
synthesis. It is mandatory to select one type if Display Event Synthesis is set to Yes.
Trend predictions
Select one of the following options.
To Do
Display the trend prediction associated to Select Display Trends.
every embedded scalar indicator supporting
trend, in Evolution Views and Reports. It is
used if evolution view or report embedding at
least one scalar indicator supporting trend.
Display a Warning Report on Trends. It is
used if warning report embedding at least one
view template with a filtering indicator
supporting trend.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Set Trend Type: Linear Regression or Click on Show Trend Options.
Moving Average
Set Predicted Period
The default value for the Number of Periods
for Trend Prediction is 0 and enables to have
the trend on the observation interval. A
read-only date field is provided together with
Predicted Period field to display the
corresponding target trend prediction date.
The icon is attached to the indicators with a Trend Prediction Supported attribute. A
tool tip appears when mouse is over this icon.
The Display Trends option is not available for Trend Periodicities
Trend on Hours of Day
Trend on Hours of Week
Trend on Days of Week
Trend on Days of Month.
Refer to the following sections for more information:
Execute warning report on trends predictions (p. 19-16)
Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports (p. 19-94).
Buttons
The following figure shows the buttons.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the buttons as follows.
To Click on
Execute views / reports / functions Execute
Execute and publish views / reports / functions Execute and Publish
The 3D Views cannot be published.
Refer to the NPO Web Publishing User
Guidedocument for more information.
Cancel the ongoing execution Cancel
Open online help Help
Refer to Access online help (p. 2-43) for
more information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the menu bar, select Analysis Desktop -> Set QoS Requirement....
Result: The QoS Requirement Level menu appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate QoS Requirement Level (Low, Medium or High), according to the
desired sensitivity of the threshold; see Threshold and sampling (p. 9-28).
Result: The QoS Requirement Level is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The QoS Requirement Level window closes.
The newly set QoS requirement becomes the default one in the used when executing
views and reports.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 3-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Functional window common tasks Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
4 Topology objects
4
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the common tasks when dealing with topology objects.
Contents
Presentation 4-1
Topology object tabs 4-2
Display topology object properties 4-11
Procedure 4-1: Add associated network objects 4-21
Use network object class 4-22
Procedure 4-2: Use network object class editor 4-25
Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class 4-31
Presentation
The objects found in the Topology window represent objects in your network. They
appear in different relational lists represented by tabs and sub-tabs.
These objects are discovered by the NPO through files retrieved from the declared data
sources (for example, parameter files, PM files). At this moment, they are considered as
operational objects.
When a network object disappears from the network, the OMC no longer reports data on
it. The NPO will detect it but will keep it in its database as a soft-deleted object (marked
with the red cross icon ).
The time until an object appears as soft-deleted depends on the way it is reported.
If an object is not reported anymore within a topology that can be considered as a
reference, then NPO will soft-delete it immediately.It is the case for instance when a 2G
TRX is not reported anymore for a BTS.For other objects, the soft-deletion will occur if
no data are reported on it for 5 days.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Soft-deleted objects can be filtered from different menus and are excluded from
aggregations.
To use network objects, drag and drop them together with their appropriate parameters
and functions in the other functional windows.
To create / load / delete customer topology objects, refer to the NPO Administration User
Guide document, to Manage customer topology objects.
Free fields are attributes that can be declared on any topology object present in the NPO
database. Refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields
using GUI.
For a network element, you can assign a different network object class. Refer to
Procedure 4-2.2: Create network object class (p. 4-28).
To create sub-working zones from the selected topology objects, refer to Procedure 8-6.3:
Create sub-working zone from topology objects list (p. 8-19).
For a list of topology objects icons, refer to Topology icons (p. 27-4).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LTE object class tree and tabs
The LTE object class tree and the corresponding tabs are as follows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WiMAX object class tabs and sub-tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Topology object tabs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-2 Example of eNodeB Properties
The following table lists the parameters and provides a brief description of each
parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Additional parameters exist for the cell properties pages, as presented in the tables below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table lists the Cell 2G object properties neighborhood parameters and
provides a brief description of each parameter.
The following table lists the Cell 2G object properties OMC external view parameters and
provides a brief description of each parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-3 Cell 2G object properties OMC external view (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-3 Cell 2G object properties OMC external view (continued)
Note: You can configure the list of OMC External View Parameters and obtain them
from the ExternalOmcCell.csv file.
The following figure shows an example of network properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Display topology object properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-1: Add associated network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 While in the Cell mode, select the necessary cells, then right click and select one of the
following options.
To Do
Add the target cells of the previously selected Perform one of the following options:
cells to the selection Add Target Cells, OR
From the menu bar, select Topology ->
Add Target Cells.
Add the serving cells of the previously Perform one of the following options:
selected cells to the selection Add Serving Cells, OR
From the menu bar, select Topology ->
Add Serving Cells.
Add both target and serving cells of the Perform one of the following options:
previously selected cells are added to the Add Neighboring Cells, OR
selection
From the menu bar, select Topology ->
Add Neighboring Cells.
Result: The resulting cells are added to the selection and the tree can be expanded, but
it is not scrolled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Use network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Cell class is a parameter that describes the geographic environment and predicted traffic
of cells.
A cell class is associated with each cell through the RNP interface.
It is used by the NPO as:
Filtering criteria for logical parameter reference values and rules
Optimization method of the network.
A new tab is added in the Topology Classification panel: Cell class.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Use network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Classification
The NPO manages two different cell classes:
Planned cell class - this value comes from RNP
Operational cell class - this value is either chosen in NPO or comes from the OMC-R
(when cell class is supported in the OMC-R, for example, in the W-CDMA).
Besides the two values (planned and operational), the NPO manages an additional flag
allowing i to remember if the Operational cell class was set to the Planned value or not.
Alcatel-Lucent provides the following predefined and non-modifiable set of cell classes,
known as system cell classes:
Rural
Suburban
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Use network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Urban
Dense urban
Indoor.
System cell classes cannot be viewed, modified, or deleted using the Network Object
Class Editor.
In order to correspond to their own optimization methods, the optimizer may define
additional customer cell classes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2: Use network object class editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Network Object Class Tree contains the customer defined network object classes,
classified on their system network object classes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Network Object Class Properties panel is used to display and edit the properties
of the selected network object class.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.2: Create network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object and Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class
editor (p. 4-26).
Result: The object is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: A new window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation message appears:
Are you sure you want to create Network Object Class
<NetworkObjectClassName> ?
When maximum number of network object classes are reached the operator is notified
about it. The maximum number is a configurable value for each object type and by
default it is set to 64.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.3: Edit network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object and Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class
editor (p. 4-26).
Result: The object is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The Network Object Class Properties panel appears in editable mode. The
network object class name is grayed and noneditable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: The updates are performed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-2.4: Delete network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object and Procedure 4-2.1: Open network object class
editor (p. 4-26).
Note: Multiple network object classes can be selected for removal.
Result: The object(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation message appears:
Are you sure you want to delete Network Object Class
<NetworkObjectClassName> ?
The selected network object class is deleted.
If the deleted network object class was used in a Rule, Diagnosis, Working Zone,
THL, or any Reference Value definition, or was associated with a network object, then
the deletion is rejected and an error message is shown.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Then
If the planned network object class is selected The cell is allocated with the newly imported
for a certain cell, with the INDOOR value network object class (URBAN for this
for example, AND example).
An RNP project is imported that has for the
same cell a different cell class, for example,
URBAN.
If a system or customer network object class is The cell is allocated with the initial network
selected for a certain cell, with the INDOOR object class (INDOOR for this example).
value for example, AND
An RNP project is imported that has for the
same cell a different cell class, for example,
URBAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 4-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Topology objects Procedure 4-3: Assign operational network object class
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The following confirmation message appears:
Are you sure you want to change the Network Object Class to <New_
Network_Object_Class> ?
The new network object class is assigned. At the next preview of the sub-menu of
network object classes, it will appear as checked.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
5 Use object zone
5
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manipulate objects as a group with objects zones.
Contents
Presentation 5-1
Procedure 5-1: Compute object zone 5-6
Display object zone properties 5-6
Procedure 5-2: Use object zone editor 5-10
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_OBJECT_ZONE_LICENSE must be installed for the Object
Zone Editor to be displayed.
Definitions
An object zone describes a set of network objects of the same type, filtered by a set of
filters. The operator can define, for example, an Object Zone containing all cells having a
call-drop of 3% or more.
The filters are dynamically applied to the current Working Zone, in order to obtain the list
of objects contained in the zone. This list of objects is therefore dynamic and depends on
the opened Working Zone.
The operation to apply filters defined in an object zone to the current Working Zone is
called computation of the object zone. Object Zones can be computed only when required
(i.e. when used), on user demand, or during Analysis Desktop initialization (auto compute
property). When an object zone is computed (whatever the reason for this computation),
its name is updated to display the number of objects contained in the zone (in parenthesis
after the object zone name).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An object type is associated with object zones to indicate which type of objects is the
result of its computation. For example, an object zone containing cells is called a Cell
Zone. A 2G Cell Zone is an ObjectZone(2G Cell).
If an object zone contains as a filter another object zone, it is called a sub-object zone.
Whenever the parent object zone criteria are changed, the changes are also inherited by
the sub-object zone (i.e. criteria are not copied in the sub-object zone, but a reference to
the parent object zone is kept).
If an object zone contains as a filter criteria a Working Zone, it does not become a
sub-object zone and the Working Zone criteria is not copied (a reference to the Working
Zone is kept).
An object zone can be manipulated as a standard network object. It can be used, for
example, as the topology dimension of an execute view or execute report operation.
Depending on the installed technology plug, some modes can be Zone Modes containing
only Object Zones of a certain type (in GSM, for example, Cell Zone, Traffic Zone and
TRX Zone are dedicated modes). A generic Object Zone mode can also be used and, in
that case, it can contain Object Zones of different types.
For the Traffic Zone mode, the NPO generates one Object Zone (of TRX type) for each
Traffic Zone of each cell. The Traffic Zone mode displays these zones as described below.
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filtering
A list of pre-defined topology filters is associated with each mode. It is possible to apply
all the filters of a mode on any Topology Classification of the concerned mode.
Filters can also be used to restrict the list of displayed objects, by using additional criteria
such as only GPRS.
The operator can apply a filter on any available Topology Classification of the mode, as
follows:
The criteria defined in the filter are then applied to the chosen classification and this
classification is updated, displaying only the filtered objects
If a filtered nonleaf object has no child, it is also hidden
The No Filter option can be used to remove any filter applied to a classification
Applying a filter on a Topology Classification does not change the other Topology
Classifications.
Whenever some objects are dropped on a filtered classification, if some of the dropped
objects are not visible due to the applied filter, then the user is informed and asked
whether to remove the filter or to ignore the non visible objects.
The following criteria may be used to filter a set of objects:
QoS criteria, to filter, for example, objects with a bad Call Drop or a low Call Success
Parameter (Logical and Design) criteria, to filter, for example, objects of a particular
frequency band or class
Topological criteria, to filter, for example, cells of a particular BSS
Explicit designation, to focus, for example, on specific cells of high interest
Free field criteria, to filter, for example, cells according to free fields.
For each type of criteria defined above, you must select a Reference Period and a
Reference Date to define how to apply the criteria.
The following comparison operators can be used as filtering criteria:
>
>=
<
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
<=
=
!= (<>)
CONTAINS
DOES_NOT_CONTAIN
LIKE (foe is like 'f*' but not like 'f*e*o')
MUSE specific comparison operators such as 'IsGreen()'
User-defined comparison operators.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
*
/
% (Modulo)
Example: to filter cells for which I:(Call_Drop_Radio / Call_Drop_BSS > 2).
When defining a filter for objects of type A, it is possible to use criteria of objects of type
B if there is a topological relation between A and B.
It is then possible to filter all cells of a particular BSC or all cells having a particular type
of Traffic Zone. When using descending topology links, the result can be more than one
(i.e. one object has only one father but can have many children). In this case, a particular
topology operator must be used, such as at_least_one_child or all_children.
Examples:
Cell filter to have only cells with a call_drop (fictional indicator name) higher than
3%:
I:(Call_Drop > 3), where I stands for Indicator.
Cell filter to have only cells of BSC1:
Filter on BSC and then: T:(OFN = 'BSC1'), where T stands for topology attributes.
Cell filter to have only cells having only GSM 1800 Traffic Zones:
Filter on Traffic Zone with All Children selected and then P:(InternalCell.frequencyR-
ange__TZ = 'GSM1800'), where P stands for Parameter.
Define a filter criteria using CONTAINS and DOES_NOT_CONTAIN operators:
P:(azimuthAntennaAngle>5) AND P:(cellClass CONTAINS *{*'URBAN'*}*)
P:(azimuthAntennaAngle>5) AND P:(cellClass DOES_NOT_CONTAIN
*{*'URBAN'*}*)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-1: Compute object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Display object zone properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to the following tables for a list of the parameters and their properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Display object zone properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Display object zone properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following properties apply for the Object Properties window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2: Use object zone editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives a brief description of the object zone operations tool bar icons.
Icon Description
Add Union
Add Intersection
Add Exclusion
Remove Operation
Clear Criteria
Status
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.1: Open object zone editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Families panel, type the family to which this object zone belongs.
Result: The family is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Sub-Family Depth, type the sub-family to which this object zone belongs.
Result: The sub-family is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Option Trees
Filter The trees available under the Filter tab are:
QoS indicator
Design Parameter (design primitives
included)
Logical Parameter
Topology Parameter
Free Field Parameter.
Object Zone The trees available under the Object Zones
tab are the Object Zones.
Working Zone The trees available under the Working Zones
tab are the Working Zones.
Check the appropriate option between Filter, Object Zone, or Working Zone.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: If you import free fields from the NPO Administration page while in the
Analysis Desktop the Object Zone Editor is used, you must refresh the free fields tree
in order to see and work with the imported free fields. For more details about the
import of free fields, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Import free fields using GUI.
Depending on your choice, drag and drop from the right panel:
The appropriate filtering criteria for Filter
A referenced Object Zone for Object Zone
A referenced Working Zone for Working Zone.
The following operations apply.
Operation Click on
Union, intersection, exclusion
Delete an operation Select it and click on
Delete a criteria for Filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Filter, the following parameters apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1 Filtering Object Zone (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-1 Filtering Object Zone (continued)
6 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation popup window appears:
Are you sure you want to create object zone <object_zone_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.2: Create object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Object Zone is created and the tree in the Object Zone mode is refreshed.
If a POD mode A is also present in the Object Zone editor, the topology tree of the
Object Zone editor will display the same objects that are present in this POD mode A
(in the Analysis Desktop main window) at the opening of the Object Zone editor.
If an object is added / suppressed in a POD mode of the Analysis Desktop main
window, trigger the Refresh option to apply the same change(s) in the topology tree
of the editor.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.3: Create object zone by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.4: Create object zone interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate cells from the Topology browser, right click and select Create
Object Zone....
Result: The Enter Object Zone Name window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the appropriate name for the object zone, then click on OK.
Result: The new object zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.5: Edit object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 5-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use object zone Procedure 5-2.6: Delete object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: A deletion confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
6 6 se topology
U
classifications
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manipulate Network Objects within topology
classifications.
Contents
Presentation 6-2
Procedure 6-1: Open topology classification editor 6-3
Topology Classifications containing Parameters 6-3
Topology Classifications based on Parent or Related objects 6-4
Topology Classifications based on Free Fields 6-5
Topology Classifications based on Topology Parameters 6-6
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification 6-8
Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy 6-11
Procedure 6-4: Edit topology classification 6-12
Procedure 6-5: Apply filter on topology classification 6-13
Procedure 6-6: Delete topology classification 6-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 6-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
The Topology Classification defines how Network Objects are classified in a tree
structure, depending on the selected mode.
Topology Classifications are specific to the used technology.
Topology Classifications can be:
System, as defined by Alcatel-Lucent
Customer, when defined by the user (see Procedure 6-2: Create topology
classification (p. 6-8) or Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy
(p. 6-11)).
Note: If parameters are not loaded for all topology objects, there can be different
number of objects in topology classifications for a certain mode. Also, if one of the
OMCs is undeclared, the same situation may appear (the objects of that OMC will no
longer be displayed in the OMC classification for example).
The correct number of objects appears in the All classification of any mode.
The network objects of a mode can be classified according to their values of selected
parameters and/or according to their parent or related objects and/or according to their
values of topology parameters and /or free fields.
The following figure presents a cell topology classification based on parameter
Frequency_Range.
The cells are displayed in the corresponding classification according to their value of the
parameter(s) selected for building the classification. To allow to immediately see which
parameter(s) is (are) used for the topology classification, the parameter label
(Frequency_Range) is displayed between parenthesis after the parameter value of the
classification node, for instance: EGSM900 (Frequency_Range).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-1: Open topology classification editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 6-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications containing Parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification containing parameters using the Procedure 6-2:
Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications based on Parent or Related objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification based on parent or related objects using the
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 6-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications based on Free Fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification based on free fields using the Procedure 6-2:
Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Topology Classifications based on Topology Parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can create a topology classification based on topology parameters using the
Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification (p. 6-8).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 6-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Classification Definition panel, define the list of classification criteria which give
the levels to be displayed in the classification.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drag the required object attributes and topology objects from the right panel, and drop
them to the topology classification tree. The drop is based on:
Relations and attributes of objects
Relations of parent child.
Dropping object attributes and topology objects on a node makes them parent of that
node. If a drop is not allowed, the cursor shows the icon.
Validation occurs when dragging, therefore the example tree is immediately updated.
If you import free fields from the NPO Administration page while in the Analysis
Desktop the Topology Classification Editor is used, you must refresh the free fields tree in
order to see and work with the imported free fields. For more details about the import of
free fields, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields
using GUI.
The maximum number of allowed levels in a topology classification is set by default to
six.
When defining the levels of the desired classifications, the following rules must be
respected:
The first level cannot be changed. It is always the Working Zone.
All intermediate levels can be Topology Objects or Object Attributes
Leaves are always the Object Type of the mode for which the topology classification
is defined
Topology Objects or Object Attributes cannot be used twice in the same Topology
Classification (i.e. not possible to define RNC->Cell->RNC).
A child object cannot be dropped over a parent object.
The resulting tree has collapsible and expandable nodes containing example data.
The user determines for each defined level (except for the first and the last levels) if the
associated level is displayed or not in the classification by checking the checkbox in front
of the considered level. If the checkbox is unchecked, the considered level is hidden in
the classification. If the (n) level is hidden in the classification, then in the upper level
(n-1), the (n+1) level objects are displayed grouped by (n) level.
To remove a selected node, click on .
As for all classifications, non-leaves levels are displayed using a (configurable) icon
indicating if the branch is open or not .
Also, the associated icons appear for the dragged objects.
Icon Name
Topology
Logical
Design
Topology Parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 6-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-2: Create topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Icon Name
Free Fields
3 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation popup window appears:
Are you sure you want to create topology classification <topology_
classification_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To Click on
Create the topology classification Yes
To cancel the creation of the topology Cancel
classification
Result: The new topology classification is created and displayed in the mode. No
filter is associated with this new classification.
If the topology classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
reopen the Analysis Desktop to see this new topology classification.
The new topology classifications can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active topology classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-3: Create topology classification by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Topology Classification Editor window, from the left frame, select the topology
classification to copy, then click on .
Result: The new topology classification is created with a default name:
<oldname>_Copy_n, where n is an incremental number to define a unique name.
Access rights are reset to the default values, but you can change them as required.
You can also modify the topology classification properties if required.
The user becomes the owner of the copied topology classification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The new topology classification is created and displayed in the mode. No
filter is associated with this new classification.
If the topology classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
reopen the Analysis Desktop to see this new topology classification.
The new topology classification can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active topology classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 6-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-4: Edit topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-5: Apply filter on topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 6-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use topology classifications Procedure 6-6: Delete topology classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Click on
Only one topology classification is selected to Yes
be deleted
Multiple topology classifications are selected Yes to all
to be deleted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
7 7 se function
U
classifications
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manipulate functions within the function classifications.
Contents
Presentation 7-1
Procedure 7-1: Open function classification editor 7-2
Procedure 7-2: Create function classification 7-3
Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy 7-6
Procedure 7-4: Edit function classification 7-7
Procedure 7-5: Delete function classification 7-8
Presentation
The Function Classification defines how functions are classified in a tree structure. It is
not dependant on the used technology.
Function Classifications can be:
System, as defined by Alcatel-Lucent
Customer, when defined by the user (see Procedure 7-2: Create function
classification (p. 7-3) or Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy
(p. 7-6)).
In the Analysis Desktop, the Function Classification Trees display only:
Public and owned private objects
Visible objects.
The Administrator and the owner can see though all private objects. They can also
visualize the non-visible objects, but using a particular graphical style and only in the
Object Editors trees (not in Analysis Desktop main function trees).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 7-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-1: Open function classification editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-2: Create function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 7-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-2: Create function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Classification Definition panel, define the list of classification criteria which gives
the levels to be displayed in the classification. For this, drag the required functions from
the right panel, and drop them to the function classification tree.
Function attributes cannot be used twice in the same function classification.
If the Family attribute is chosen to classify the functions, then it must be at the lowest
level of the classification definition. The Family attribute cannot be dropped between
other function attributes.
If a function classification tree contains the Family attribute, the function classification
editor displays all the levels of family and sub-family.
Note: The following function types cannot be created or modified in the function
classification editor:
Tuning
Event
Free fields.
Dropping them on a node makes them parent of that node. If a drop is not allowed, the
cursor shows that .
Validation occurs when dragging , therefore the example tree is immediately updated.
The maximum number of allowed levels in a function classification is set by default to
six.
The resulting tree has collapsible and expandable nodes containing example data.
To remove a selected node, click on .
As for all classifications, non-leaves levels are displayed using a (configurable) icon
indicating if the branch is open or not .
Result: As for all classifications, non-leaves levels are displayed using a
(configurable) icon indicating if the branch is open or not .
The Example Tree in the right frame of the Classification Definition panel shows a
replica of the classification levels that are being defined. The tree is updated every
time the classification level tree is updated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-2: Create function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation popup window appears:
Are you sure you want to create function classification <function_
classification_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The new function classification is created and displayed in the Function
Classification tabs. No filter is associated with this new classification.
If the function classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
manually refresh the tree.
The new function classifications can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active function classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 7-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-3: Create function classification by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Function Classification Editor window, from the left frame, select the function
classification to copy, then click on .
Result: The new function classification is created with a default name:
<oldname>_Copy_n, where n is an incremental number to define a unique name.
You can also modify the function classification properties if required.
The user becomes the owner of the function classification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The new function classification is created. No filter is associated with this
new classification.
If the function classification is public, other users are notified and they have to
manually refresh the tree.
The new function classification can be saved as an implicit User Preference for the
Mode, as well as the new current active function classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-4: Edit function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 7-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use function classifications Procedure 7-5: Delete function classification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Delete only one selected function classification Yes
Delete multiple selected function classifications Yes to all
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
8 Use working zone
8
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage the Working Zone editor. It describes how to
create, create by copy, edit and delete a Working Zone.
Contents
Presentation 8-1
Procedure 8-1: Open working zone editor 8-4
Procedure 8-2: Create working zone 8-5
Procedure 8-3: Create working zone by copy 8-10
Procedure 8-4: Edit working zone 8-11
Procedure 8-5: Delete working zone 8-12
Procedure 8-6: Create sub-working zones 8-13
Procedure 8-7: Change current working zone 8-22
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_WORKING_ZONE license must be installed for the Working
Zone Editor to be displayed.
The Working Zone Manager allows the optimizer to define a specific subset of cells in the
network as a personal working zone.
It is also defined by a set of filters dynamically applied to the database whenever required
(when opening the Working Zone). Therefore, the set of network elements retrieved
through the filters may vary as the operational network changes in the database.
To compute a Working Zone, the list of objects contained in the zone for each standard is
computed and the results are merged into one single zone.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If a Working Zone contains as a filter another Working Zone, it is called a Sub-Working
Zone. Such Working Zones inherit the filters of their parent and whenever the parent
Working Zone criteria are changed, the Sub-Working Zone criteria are also updated
(when opened).
The Working Zone is also used to manage secured access to some parts of the network.
When defining a Working Zone, the administrator can restrict its access to a limited set of
operators. Only the administrator can create public Working Zones. An OAD identifier is
automatically associated with each public Working Zone.
The Global Working Zone is a system Working Zone that contains the entire network.
Regular operators can only restrict a Working Zone they can access. They cannot create
Working Zones that are not Sub-Working Zones. These Sub-Working Zones have the
same security access as their reference Working Zone (the one from which they were
created), sharing the same OAD identifier. Sub-Working Zones created by users can only
be private.
Working zones having their visible flag set to false are hidden in the working zone view
displayed at Analysis Desktop starting and change working view (except for
Administrator), but are visible in working zone Editor (for the Administrator and their
owner only).
Depending on the pre-defined number of cells, Working Zones are classified in two
categories:
Standard Working Zones, containing less than 2000 cells and all modes
Large Working Zones, containing more than 2000 cells. In this case, not all modes are
available (for example, Adjacency Mode).
For Adjacency Mode to be available, you must set the WorkingZonesAllowed
parameter for ADJ to true, from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/technologies/GSM/QoS/metadata/MaatQueryMetadata.xml
To change the limit of 2000 cells for Standard Working Zones, you must modify
the MAX_CORE_OBJECT_COUNT parameter, from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/topology/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/maat/topology/config/
maatTopo.cfg
This change requires a stop / start NPO from Process Monitoring page in order to be
taken into account in NPO, refer to NPO Platform User Guide document.
Important! Changing these parameters is not under Alcatel-Lucent responsibility.
Putting higher values then the values tested in Alcatel-Lucent labs may cause higher
response time or even request that do not answer.
Each technology can specify the modes available for Standard or Large Working Zones.
The modes that were defined as not available in Large Working Zones (because their
number of objects in a working zone is bigger than the pre-defined threshold) become
accessible when working in Large Working Zone by populating them on-demand (up to a
given maximum number objects). It is called POD mode. For more information, refer to
Chapter 21, POD mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To update the number of cells that can be monitored in a working zone, refer to the NPO
Administration User Guide document, to Modify Working Zone Dimension.
The following table gives a brief description of the working zone operations tool bar
icons.
Icon Description
Add Union
Add Intersection
Add Exclusion
Remove Operation
Clear Criteria
Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-1: Open working zone editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-2: Create working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-2: Create working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The parameters are defined.
If the Secured option was given to the working zone, the Users panel becomes
available.
To give access to one or several users to the created working zone, select them from
the Users without access list and click on . This includes them in the Users with
access list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Add new Background / CCA layers Perform the following steps:
1. Click on Add.
2. Select the appropriate imported layer.
3. Choose the background or the CCA type.
4. Click on OK.
If no layer is loaded, a default tree structure
with four nodes (without the root node) are
displayed in the layer manager.
If no layers are associated with the working
zone and no layers are saved in the user
preferences, a default world map is loaded.
Remove an existing Background / CCA layer Select it and click on Remove.
from the Layer List
Order an existing layer up or down in the Click on Move Up or Move Down.
Layer List The Layers in the top of the list are rendered
on the top in the cartography viewport.
The order of layer in the layer manager must
always be:
Thematic Layer
Network Objects
CCA
Backgrounds
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-2: Create working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The created Layer List is the list of layers to download at the start of the
application.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filter Trees
Filter The trees available under the Filter tab are:
Design Parameter
Logical Parameter
Free Field Parameter
Topology Parameter
Operators.
Working Zone The trees available under the Working Zones
tab are the Working Zones.
To Click on
Delete an operation
Delete a criteria for Filter
The allowed operators are: >, <, >=, <=, =, !=, contains, doesn't contain, like. Operands
can also contain mathematical operations (+, -, *, / , numeric constants).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-2: Create working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unitary NPO Specific Operators such as IsGreen can also be used.
Result: The status of the object zone criteria is shown in the icon.
Icon Criteria
Color
Green All the nodes are checked and are valid.
Orange One or more nodes is not checked.
Red One or more nodes has the Criteria is not valid status.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation popup window appears:
Are you sure you want to create working zone <working_zone_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-2: Create working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Working Zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-3: Create working zone by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Result: The new working zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-4: Edit working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click on .
Result: The Working Zone Properties panel appears. All fields except for the name
can be edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Result: The Working Zone is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-5: Delete working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6: Create sub-working zones
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 8-6.3: Create sub-working zone from topology objects list (p. 8-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.1: Create sub-working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.1: Create sub-working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.1: Create sub-working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Add new Background / CCA layers Perform the following steps:
1. Click on Add.
2. Select the appropriate imported layer.
3. Choose the background or the CCA type.
4. Click on OK.
If no layer is loaded, a default tree structure
with four nodes (without the root node) are
displayed in the layer manager.
If no layers are associated with the working
zone and no layers are saved in the user
preferences, a default world map is loaded.
To remove an existing Background / CCA Select it and click on Remove.
layer from the Layer List
To order an existing layer up or down in the Click on Move Up or Move Down.
Layer List The Layers in the top of the list are rendered
on the top in the cartography viewport.
The order of layer in the layer manager must
always be:
Thematic Layer
Network Objects
CCA
Backgrounds.
Result: The created Layer List is the list of layers to download at the start of the
application.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filter Trees
Filter The trees available under the Filter tab are:
Design Parameter
Logical Parameter
Free Field Parameter
Topology Parameter
Operators.
Working Zone The trees available under the Working Zones
tab are the Working Zones.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.1: Create sub-working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check the appropriate option between Filter or Working Zone .
Depending on your choice, add by a drag and drop operation from the right panel:
The appropriate filtering criteria for Filter; refer to Filtering (p. 5-3) and to Table
5-1, Filtering Object Zone (p. 5-15).
A referenced Working Zone, for Working Zone.
The following operations apply:
Union
Intersection
Exclusion.
To Click on
Delete an operation
Delete a criteria for Filter
The allowed operators are: >, <, >=, <=, =, !=, contains, doesn't contain, like. Operands
can also contain mathematical operations (+, -, *, / , numeric constants).
Unitary NPO Specific Operators such as IsGreen can also be used.
Result: The status of the object zone criteria is shown in the .
Icon Criteria
Color
Green All the nodes are checked and are valid.
Orange One or more nodes is not checked.
Red One or more nodes has the Criteria is not valid status.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation popup window appears:
Are you sure you want to create working zone <working_zone_name> ?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
Result: The Working Zone is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.2: Create sub-working zone from object zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.3: Create sub-working zone from topology
objects list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.4: Create and open sub-working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more Topology Objects or an Object Zone in the Topology browser.
Result: The Topology Objects are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on the list and select Create and Open Sub-Working Zone....
Result: The Create and Open Sub-Working Zone window appears with a message
indicating that the newly created working zone will be opened after creation and the
change cannot be canceled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-6.5: Create sub-working zone by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Result: The Confirm Working Zone Creation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Yes.
Result: The sub-working zone is created at the same level as the copied sub-working
zone, and inherits the filters of its parent.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 8-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use working zone Procedure 8-7: Change current working zone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The selected working zone is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
9 9 se counters and
U
indicators
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage counters and indicators.
Contents
Presentation 9-1
Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and descriptions 9-46
Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and descriptions 9-53
Procedure 9-3: Propagate counters and indicators 9-63
Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator 9-64
Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour 9-66
Procedure 9-6: Display counter and indicator values 9-68
Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters 9-69
Procedure 9-8: Find indicator from counter 9-72
Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor 9-73
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_QOS_<TECHNO>_LICENSE must be installed, so that the
administrator can declare QoS data sources for a given technology (GSM, W-CDMA,
LTE).
The MUSE_QOS_INDICATOR_CREATION_LICENSE must be installed to be
able to create or edit indicators.
If the MUSE_QOS_HISTORY_LICENSE is not installed, then the history of the
QoS Data is limited to one week.
To see the necessary FADs to create / edit / delete stored or calculated indicators, refer
to Tasks in the system, to QoS tasks for NPO section, from User Administration
Handbook document.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Counters are retrieved from the NPO and used as building blocks in the formation of
indicators.
An Indicator is an Optimization Application view of a network property.
The indicator is computed from performance measurements, counters values, other
indicators, or any other available network parameter values, such as radio parameters.
An indicator is defined on Availability Domains that consist of sets of Network Objects
and period types. An indicator value can be calculated for the specified Network Objects
and for the possible period types only. An indicator has no meaning for Network Objects
and / or period types that are not specified in its Availability Domain.
An indicator is consolidated. Consolidation consists of normalization, and optionally, of
aggregation (spatial or temporal).
An indicator can be stored. For stored indicators, the storage duration can be configured.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The availability domain for the basic indicator, if the indicator has a non-empty
aggregation function, is based on:
Counters only, as it is extended to a high level in the hierarchy (temporal and
spatial). It is done for all possible levels; it is not possible to select several levels
only.
If a spatial aggregation method is defined, then the topology part is extended to all
objects belonging to the spatial aggregation path defined by the indicator group.
Counters and parameters, as it is extended to a high level only in the temporal
hierarchy.
The topology part of the availability domain cannot be extended as parameters do
not have any spatial aggregation method.
If a stored temporal aggregation is defined by a:
Basic indicator, the availability domain for the temporal part is extended to Daily /
Weekly / Monthly for all the objects belonging to the availability domain of the basic
indicator
Calculated indicator, the availability domain for the temporal part is extended to Daily
/ Weekly / Monthly for all the objects belonging to the availability domain of the
calculated indicator.
Calculated indicators
A calculated indicator is an indicator calculated on basic or other calculated indicators, or
on parameters, using a formula independent of the equipment release with the same
topology level (network object type) and periodicity.
Calculated indicators can be:
Classical (without any particular aggregation)
With stored temporal aggregation function
With multiple spatial levels, also called complex indicator level 1, or change topology
level
This is a calculated indicator using a formula that mixes indicators at different
topology levels, such as TRX, CELL, BSC, Network.
Example: if an indicator formula is CALL_DROP_DIST_SUP = CALL_DROP /
sup(CALL_DROP), then to calculate this indicator at TRX level, the system does:
CALL_DROP_DIST_SUPTRX = CALL_DROPTRX / CALL_DROPCELL
Two functions are possible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A classical calculated indicator would be: RTCH_TRAFFIC_OFFER_TOTAL =
ErlangB([Sigma ]channelcell)
Example
An indicator defined as Call_drop = Call_success / Call_Attempt is calculated differently
if it is classical, or if it has a stored temporal aggregation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: When using advanced operators such as OBJSUP, OBJINF in the formula of
complex indicators, the Availability Domain must be manually determined (manually
uncheck the non supported periodicities).
Example: For a complex indicator defined as Call_drop / ObjSup(Call_drop), the CZ
and Network should not be part of the availability domain.
Indicator group
The indicator group has only one source. A source is a unique combination of PM type,
that collects network elements and source network elements for a dedicated release.
Each indicator group is stored in a different table in the database. In the data warehouse,
each indicator group corresponds to a different table.
All the indicators of the same group have the same spatial aggregation path.
Counter attributes
The following tables describe the content of a counter dictionary.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Header
Domains
Releases
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Counters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Structure Type: Scalar
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telecom families
Indicator attributes
The following tables describe the content of an indicator dictionary.
Header
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Release
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Indicator group
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telecom indicators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Temporal aggregation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telecom family
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Consolidation
Indicator consolidation is used to normalize and optionally to aggregate QoS data inside
the data warehouse.
Aggregation and normalization apply only on indicators.
It is possible to calculate multiple temporal aggregation from the same indicator at a raw
level.
The scheduler launches the consolidation scripts every night. If the previous day
consolidation is not finished, the system waits for the completion of the ongoing loading
of files, before launching the consolidation for the current day. If any files are missing
(not in the exchange directory), the consolidation starts anyway.
The administrator can manually launch the consolidation if they find out that there is
recovered data that has not been consolidated.
The consolidation scripts include:
Data normalization, whereby normalized indicator tables are computed using the
default normalization methods
Data aggregation, whereby aggregated tables are computed using normalized
indicators and aggregation methods.
The obtained indicator data is aggregated spatially (static aggregation) and then
temporally (daily, weekly, and monthly aggregations). Daily aggregation is always
performed; weekly and monthly are only performed on the first day of the week or of
the month.
NPO consolidates daily data using the time zone configured on the NPO server.
To view the Consolidation Follow Up, refer to Procedure 2-9: View consolidation follow
up (p. 2-54).
Normalization
Normalization consists of adapting basic indicator values for display purposes, for
indicator formula calculations, or for aggregation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It comprises the following processes.
Process Description
Interpolation To automatically complete the missing values.
There are six customizable interpolation methods:
None
Only the existing values are used (no interpolation).
Only OK value
When a display period is not fully available, a NULL value is
provided for that displayed period.
Extend
Only the existing values are used and they are extended to the
wanted displayed period.
Zero
All the missing periods are set to the zero value.
Linear
The missing values are replaced by a linear interpolation between
the previous known value and the next known value.
Padding
All the missing periods are set to a padding value. This is zero by
default, but can be configurable through the Padding parameter.
Period alignment To set the same measurement period for all measurement data involved
(time shift) in the aggregation or formula calculation (for example 4H, 1H, 15mn).
Synchronization of To set the same beginning / end dates for aggregation or formula
measurement data calculation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Aggregation
Indicators can be aggregated whenever requested.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
There are two types of aggregation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example aggregation
Consider that RTCH_CONG indicator has two aggregation functions: TOT and MAX.
MAX aggregation automatically produces an indicator called RTCH_CONG_MAX.
RTCH_CONG_MAX has the same counter formula as RTCH_CONG. It is computed
each night based on RTCH_CONG as the raw level, and not during PM loading.
RTCH_CONG_MAX is potentially available at hourly level.
If the administrator removes this level from its availability domain, the following occurs:
A telecom indicator, called RTCH_CONG
A temporal aggregation, called RTCH_CONG
A temporal aggregation, called RTCH_CONG_MAX.
When browsing the functions in the Analysis Desktop, you can see both temporal
aggregations: RTCH_CONG and RTCH_CONG_MAX, as they are considered
presentation indicators. When displaying the indicator documentation, there is a main
entry for the telecom indicator RTCH_CONG and two sub-entries for the two temporal
aggregations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Busy hour
Using the hourly consolidated data:
The busy hour reference (busy hour position) is used to retrieve the per-day
position (the hour of the day) when a reference indicator reaches its maximum value
(00:00 00:59 = 0, 01:00 01:59 = 1).
The indicator value at busy hour is used to return the value of an indicator, at the
busy hour of a reference indicator (usually not the same).
This is not correlated to the maximum value of that indicator.
The example below tries to get the call drop rate when the call number is maximum,
and:
Busy hour reference is call number
Indicator value at busy hour is call drop rate.
The Fixed Busy Hour choice in the execution context consists in a list of constant hours
from 00 to 23.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To execute the functions on that particular fixed hour, you can select fixed busy hour in
the Execution Context window.
If a Fixed Busy Hour is chosen as periodicity, the resulting busy hour is constant along all
dates of the observation period.
In the Execution Context window, for Fixed Busy Hour, the date appears as defined in
the user preferences followed by <fixed busy hour value>.
Busy hour can either be computed dynamically by the system (when the busy hour option
is checked in execution context), it can also be computed during consolidation and stored.
When computing a busy hour on an object zone, the reference indicator is first calculated
on the object zone, the maximum value is taken, and then the indicator is computed as the
busy hour value.
Example:
Cell1 traffic: 16H => 10, 17H => 8, 18H=>0
Cell2 traffic: 16H => 0, 17H => 8, 18H=>10
Related to this example, in the case of:
Busy Hour / Object Zone execute view: If you calculate indicator call_drop at the
busy hour of this object zone, the maximum traffic of Cell1+Cell2 is at 17H, so the
result will be call_drop( 17H,cell1)+call_drop(17H,cell2)
Busy Hour stored aggregation the busy hour is calculated for each cells and stored.
For Cell1, the system store call_drop(16H), for cell2 it store call_drop(18H), this
would correspond to an indicator call_drop_bh.
It is also possible to calculate object zone on call_drop_bh.
Daily average value
The objective of Daily Average Value computation is to get an average busy hour value
for a given period (several days).
The algorithm is called nDAV, n being the number of reference days for the average
computation.
In NPO, nDAV is usually computed for a week or a month using the following criteria:
A number of reference days is selected (for instance n=3 or n=5).
The per day busy hour value is computed and the n days where the reference indicator
reaches its maximum values are selected.
The indicator value is the average of the indicator for those n busy hours.
3DAV Example
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PM data purge
As soon as the consolidation is completed, the data whose storage duration has expired is
purged / removed from NPO data warehouse.
This is done for performance and storage space reasons, and depends on the configured
storage durations. The minimum purge granularity is the day.
The following table provides an illustration of the default size of each partition and their
storage duration.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration Handbook document, to:
Check Default Storage Duration
Configure Indicator Storage Duration
Configure Parameter Storage Duration
Configure availability and inventory management data storage duration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reliability
Note: This feature is not applicable for W-CDMA and LTE.
The value of the reliability indicator informs the operator about loss of QoS data.
The reliability indicators detect:
Lost objects - If any object is lost, the number of the observed objects is lower than
the number of the expected objects
Lost periods - If any period is lost, the observed time is lower than the expected time.
Indicators are always displayed, even if some data may be missing. The reliability
indicates if the displayed value is reliable (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
Therefore, the displayed value for an indicator can be:
Correct, whereby the reliability is TRUE
Partially correct (on a limited domain), whereby the reliability is FALSE
Wrong, whereby the reliability is FALSE.
The reliability indicator is associated with one or several indicators, through the
Reliability Indicator field; refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75).
The reliability indicator is associated with one or several indicators, through the
Reliability Indicator field; refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75).
The QoS loss of data may occur on:
Current Network exploitation operations (reset)
Some software problems or operator commands such as board reset may reset the
counter values on one or several boards. In this case, the equipment cannot provide
the counter values associated with these boards for the entire PM period. The
concerned counters are put to NULL. When a problem occurs on some equipment (for
example, on the MFS) and all the counters are NULL, then a specific flag is set to
active in the PM file to indicate that there are no available counters in the PM file.
QoS files transfer problems.
Due to different problems (BSC / MFS or OMC-R failure), some PM files can be lost.
Also, PM files that arrive too late to be processed by the different aggregation scripts
performed once a night, are considered as lost.
Note: The following rules apply:
The reliability indicator is not developed for the adjacency object
The Alcatel-Lucent reliability indicator is not developed for QoS indicators based
on RIM-NACC counters (RIM-NACC = RAN Information Management -
Network Assisted Cell Change)
The displayed value for an indicator can be good and reliability false when an
object is added, removed or migrated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Thresholds are used for highlighting QoS values. This is done using colors in a view or
report, in order to quickly see which values are critical, major, etc. (see Highlight in
view (p. 18-83)).
The indicators for which thresholds are defined are also used when creating warning
reports. In this way, the report results may be filtered according to the set thresholds (see
Warning reports (p. 19-6)).
Three alert thresholds corresponding to three QoS requirement levels can be defined for
each QoS indicator: red, orange, and yellow, each having three definable sensitivities. See
Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement (p. 3-33) to change the requirement level.
If the value of the reference indicator upper_is_fault is:
TRUE, min color is green and max color is red
FALSE, min color is red and max color is green.
If the upper_is_fault of the sampling indicator is:
TRUE, then the threshold is not taken into consideration if the sampling indicator is
below the sampling value
FALSE, then the threshold is not taken into consideration if the sampling indicator is
above the sampling value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 9-3 Threshold and sampling for Call_Success_Rate indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mathematical functions
EXP, EXP10, LN, LOG, SQR, SQRT, INT, ROUND, ABS, COS, SIN, TAN, FACT,
MOD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Logical functions
ISNULL, ISDIV0, NOT, AND, OR, =, >, <, >=, <=, <>, LIKE, TO_BOOLEAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Specific functions
NZ, NV, TDIV0, TDIV, IF, TIME_MEASURED, DYNAMICROLLUP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Statistical functions
The following statistical functions apply:
OFFERED
OFFERED_ERLANGC
OFFERED_POISSON
OFFERED_REQUIRED
OFFERED_REQ_ERLANGC
OFFERED_REQ_POISSON
GOS
GOS_ERLANGC
GOS_POISSON
OFFERED functions indicate the offered traffic according to the Erlang B law. The used
argument is the number of channels and GoS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conversion functions
To scalar functions
V_INDEX, V_MAXIMUM, V_MINIMUM, V_TOTAL, V_AVERAGE,
V_MAX_INDEX, M_MAXIMUM, M_MINIMUM, M_TOTAL, M_AVERAGE
To vector functions
VECTOR, ARRAY, REVERSE
MAXIMUM_COL
MINIMUM_COL,
TOTAL_COL,
AVERAGE _COL,
MAXIMUM_ROW,
MINIMUM_ROW,
TOTAL_ROW
AVERAGE_ROW
CUMUL
CUMUL_REVERSE,
SUMPRODUCT_COL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-35
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SUMPRODUCT_ROW
INTERVAL
MIDDLE
MIDDLE_POS
MIDDLE_LEV
V_ROUND
V_IF
M_ROW_INDEX
SUMPRODUCT_COLN
SUMPRODUCT_ROWN
To matrix functions
MATRIX, MATRIX_COL, MATRIX_ROW, ARRAY_COL, ARRAY_ROW,
V_PRODUCT, M_PRODUCT, CUMUL_COLS, CUMUL_ROWS, CUMUL_REVER-
SE_COLS, CUMUL_REVERSE_ROWS, REVERSE_COL, REVERSE_ROW,
TRANSPOSE, M_ROUND, M_IF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-36 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-37
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-38 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-39
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-40 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Aggregation functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-41
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Topology complex functions
To compute an indicator the indicators of a given topology object are generally used. This
topology object corresponds to the one selected by the user. For some complex indicators,
this basic behavior is not applicable and the formula may request to use indicators coming
from related objects. MUSE supports to use indicators coming from objects that are above
or below the current object inside the topology and part of the used indicator availability
domain.
Function Description
ObjSupp(indicator or formula) This function allows retrieving the indicator
value on the direct upper object (belonging to
the availability domain). If there is no upper
objects, then an empty result is returned.
ObjSuppSpecific(indicator or formula, object This function allows retrieving the indicator
type) value on an upper object (belonging to the
availability domain) of a given type.
ObjInf(indicator or formula, aggregation type) This function returns an aggregated value
computed from indicators on the object zone
contained objects.
ObjSelected(indicator or formula, relation This function allows retrieving the indicator
path) value on a relatedobject (belonging to the
availability domain).
ObjSelection This function selects an indicator or a formula
among three according the object type:
formulaB: Indicator or formula used for
object types below the specific object type
formulaE: Indicator or formula used for
object type equal to the specific object
type
formulaA: Indicator or formula used for
object types above the specific object type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-42 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function Description
Topology counting indicators Those indicators are composed of a single
function call, any of the three functions below
can be used:
OBJECT_COUNT(<object_type>)
CHILDREN_COUNT(<children_type>)
CHILDREN_COUNT()
The indicators defined using the
OBJECT_COUNT function are by default
available on every object type and daily levels
because OBJECT_COUNT simply returns the
number of objects for a given type at a given
date.
The indicators defined using the
CHILDREN_COUNT functions are available
only on every object type and daily levels
because they return the number of children for
a given object on a given date.
Their spatial aggregation method is SUM,
interpolation method is PREVIOUS.
Log counting indicators A single function call is used:
LOG_COUNT(<filtering expression>').
The indicators defined using the
LOG_COUNT function are available on every
object type and daily levels because
LOG_COUNT simply returns the number of
logs matching a filter on a given date. Their
spatial aggregation method is SUM,
interpolation method is PADDING(0).
The function call: LOG_COUNT_
REC('<object type>',<filtering expression>'),
counts log occurrences over a period
recursively on children and parents.
The functions LOG_COUNT and
LOG_COUNT_REC cannot be used in
WiMAX.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-43
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function Description
Alarm counting indicators The function call: ALARM_
COUNT(<filtering expression>'), allows
counting active alarms over a period.
The indicators - defined using the
ALARM_COUNT function - are available on
every object type and daily levels because
ALARM_COUNT simply returns the number
of alarms matching a filter on a given date.
Such an indicator returns information about
the number of active alarms for each period
inside a time interval.
The filtering expression allows filtering on:
The object type
The event type
The severity
The probable cause
The specific problem
The friendly name.
Their spatial aggregation method is SUM,
interpolation method is PADDING(0).
The function call: ALARM_COUNT_
R(<filtering expression>'), allows counting
raised alarms over a period.
The function call: ALARM_COUNT_
REC('<object type>',<filtering expression>'),
counts alarm occurrences over a period
recursively on objects, children and parents.
The function call: ALARM_COUNT_R_
REC('<object type>',<filtering expression>'),
counts alarm occurrences over a period (raised
alarms only) recursively on objects, children
and parents.
The functions ALARM_COUNT,
ALARM_COUNT_R, ALARM_COUNT_
REC and ALARM_COUNT_R_REC cannot
be used in WiMAX.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-44 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function Description
Alarm outage indicator Similar to alarm counting indicators but it
sums the alarm outage time (clear time event
time) instead of simply counting alarms.
The function call: ALARM_
OUTAGE(<filtering expression>'), allows
computing the disturbance (number of
seconds) caused by the active alarms.
The function call:ALARM_OUTAGE_
R(<filtering expression>'), allows computing
the disturbance (number of seconds) caused by
the raised alarms.
The function call:ALARM_OUTAGE_
REC('<object type>',<filtering expression>'),
estimates alarm outage over a period
recursively on objects, children and parents.
The function call:ALARM_OUTAGE_R_
REC('<object type>',<filtering expression>'),
estimates alarm outage over a period (raised
alarms only) recursively on objects, children
and parents.
The functions ALARM_OUTAGE,
ALARM_OUTAGE_R, ALARM_OUTAGE_
REC and ALARM_OUTAGE_R_REC cannot
be used in WiMAX.
Alarm Cut-off indicators -
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-45
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
To display the properties Right click on the network object / counter / indicator /
design parameter / logical parameter / report / view,
then select Properties... from the popup menu, OR
Double click on the item whose properties to view.
To view the properties of an item in Select the item, then select Topology -> Properties...
the topology classification from the tool bar, OR
Select the item, then press Alt+Enter.
To view the properties of a counter / Select the item, then select Data -> Properties... from
indicator / design parameter / logical the tool bar.
parameter / report / view:
Select the item, then press Ctrl+P.
2 To keep a copy of the Properties window and display several on screen at the same time,
use the Snapshot feature.
Click on .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-46 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The selected windows remain on screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Edit the properties Perform the following steps:
1. In the Properties window, click on Edit.
The specific editor opens with the
corresponding template displayed.
2. Click on .
3. Perform the appropriate changes, then
save by clicking on .
4. Close the template by clicking on Close.
To view the results of the edit, reselect the
object, right click and select Properties.
View the previous object in the same category Click on
View the next object in the same category Click on
View the previous page in the same category Click on
View the next page in the same category Click on
Close the window Click on Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-47
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-48 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-49
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-50 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-51
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-1: Display and manage counter properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Matrix counter additional parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-52 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
To display the properties Right click on the network object / counter / indicator /
design parameter / logical parameter / report / view,
then select Properties... from the popup menu, OR
Double click on the item whose properties to view.
To view the properties of an item in Select the item, then select Topology -> Properties...
the topology classification from the tool bar, OR
Select the item, then press Alt+Enter.
To view the properties of a counter / Select the item, then select Data -> Properties... from
indicator / design parameter / logical the tool bar.
parameter / report / view:
Select the item, then press Ctrl+P.
2 To keep a copy of the Properties window and display several on screen at the same time,
use the Snapshot feature.
Click on .
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-53
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The selected windows remain on screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Edit the properties Perform the following steps:
1. In the Properties window, click on Edit.
The specific editor opens with the
corresponding template displayed.
2. Click on .
3. Perform the appropriate changes, then
save by clicking on .
4. Close the template by clicking on Close.
To view the results of the edit, reselect the
object, right click and select Properties.
View the previous object in the same category Click on
View the next object in the same category Click on
View the previous page in the same category Click on
View the next page in the same category Click on
Close the window Click on Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-54 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-55
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-58 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-59
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-60 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stored temporal aggregations additional parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-61
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-2: Display and manage indicator properties and
descriptions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-62 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-3: Propagate counters and indicators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the following procedure to propagate the selected item to the corresponding function
tree.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected item and drop it to required function tab. The mouse pointer changes to
.
Result: Depending on how the parameter Display time before a tab is raised and
made active is set as a user preference, the target counter tree:
Is automatically displayed
You have to switch to the target counter tree to view it.
The view is auto-scrolled until the first selected object is visible.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-63
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Indicator Editor window; refer to Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor
(p. 9-74).
Result: The Indicator Editor window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If Then
You want to create an indicator Click on Create.
The Indicator Type popup window opens.
In the Indicator Type window, select the type of the
indicator and click on OK.
You want to copy an indicator Click on Copy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check Calculated.
Result: The parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Uncheck Temporary Indicator to enable the Stored option from the New Temporal
Aggregation panel.
Result: The parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Create a MAX stored temporal aggregation for the calculated reference indicator:
Check the Stored radio button
For the Temporal Aggregation Method, select Maximum.
Note: This reference indicator can be used to create BH stored temporal aggregations
at Daily, Weekly, Monthly periodicities for any kind of indicator (stored or
calculated).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-64 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The stored temporal aggregation for the calculated reference indicator is
defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Type the Reference (three characters maximum) and the full Name.
Note: It is recommended to use MAX as Reference value.
Result: The Reference and Name are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on Apply.
Result: The indicator with Busy Hour will be available the next day, after the
automatic consolidation of the day.
Note: If the BH reference indicator takes several times the same value during the
day, the first one is considered as the Busy Hour.
For more information refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75) and Busy
hour (p. 9-25).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-65
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Indicator Editor window; refer to Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor
(p. 9-74).
Result: The Indicator Editor window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If Then
You want to create an indicator Click on Create.
The Indicator Type popup window opens.
In the Indicator Type window, select the type of the
indicator and click on OK.
You want to copy an indicator Click on Copy.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check Calculated.
Result: The parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Uncheck Temporary Indicator to enable the Stored option from the New Temporal
Aggregation panel.
Result: The parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-66 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-5: Create indicator value at busy hour
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The stored temporal aggregation for the calculated reference indicator is
defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Type the Reference (three characters maximum) and the full Name.
Note: It is recommended to use BH as Reference value.
Result: The Reference and Name are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click on Apply.
Result: The indicator with Busy Hour will be available the next day, after the
automatic consolidation of the day.
Note: If the BH reference indicator takes several times the same value during the
day, the first one is considered as the Busy Hour.
For more information refer to Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator (p. 9-75) and Busy
hour (p. 9-25).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-67
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-6: Display counter and indicator values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-68 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on the selected cell and select Display type 110 counters....
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-69
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Properties page of the PM 110 type counters related to the selected cell
appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-70 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-7: Display type 110 counters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-71
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-8: Find indicator from counter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the indicator tree, right click and select Find Indicator from Counter.
Result: The Search Indicator by Counter Name window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the full reference name of the counter by which the indicator tree is searched, then
click on Search.
Result: If any node is already selected in the indicator tree when the search is
triggered, then the first indicator after the selected node referring only to the specified
counter in its formula, is selected in the indicator tree.
If no node is already selected in the indicator tree when this search is triggered, then
the first indicator referring only to the specified counter in its formula, is selected in
the indicator tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-72 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-73
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.1: Open indicator editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-74 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-75
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the indicator of Scalar type, you can choose the Supports Trend Prediction option. For
more information regarding the Trend Prediction option, refer to Trend predictions
(p. 3-30).
Result: The telecom parameters of the indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-76 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Note: Creation of stored indicator by 2 different users on the same time is not
possible.
Create a Basic (Stored) Indicator:
Click on the Basic (Stored) radio button.
The system checks if the maximum number of customer stored indicators is reached.
If yes, the operation is rejected; if no, you can continue.
Add the first and second interpolation methods. If Padding is selected, add the
padding number in the Pad Value field
Choose to have (or not) dynamic interpolation, using the
Support Dynamic Interpolation button. Refer to Interpolation (p. 3-27) and
Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-77
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Add the appropriate Consolidation Method, by choosing one of the following: Sum,
Count, Average, Maximum, Minimum, COUNT_PRESENT, COUNT_MISSING
Add the appropriate Spatial Aggregation, by choosing one of the following: Sum,
Count, Average, Maximum, Minimum, DBAVG, MEDIAN, STDDEV, VARIANCE,
PERCENTILE, None
Add an indicator group.
You can either:
Select a predefined compatible group (with the same PM type, source, and
collecting network element) from the dropdown list group
The predefined dropdown list contains only the groups with the spatial
aggregation path which includes the source network object(s) of the counter used
in the formula, in a hierarchical order.
Create your own group:
Click on Add Group. The Add Group window opens.
Type the appropriate indicator group name.
Select the Spatial Aggregation Path from the dropdown list, which includes the
object types of the source network objects of the counters used in the formula.
Click on OK to associate the spatial aggregation path with the newly created
indicator group.
Check Daily Group check box if you want the groups to be daily. The Availability
Domain selected for the group in the Presentation Indicator panel does not
contain any H selected.
You must add at least one and a maximum of five Indicator Formulas:
Choose the Technology, Supplier, Release, Spatial Aggregation, then add the
indicator formula in the Formula field. See Basic indicators (p. 9-3) for the
allowed elements in formula.
To check the validity of a basic indicator formula, select the formula row, right
click on it and select Check Formula.
If it is incorrect, an error message appears indicating the cause of the error: syntax
error, unknown formula and / or indicators. Correct it until it is valid.
If a division by zero occurs, then a NULL value is put in the database.
Basic Indicators can have multiple formulae associated per technology. Depending
on the number of available technologies, formulas can be added.
Right click on the Formula field and select Add. This adds a row at the end of the
table for indicator formula.
To remove a row in the Formula field, right click on it and select Remove.
Result: The parameters of the basic indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If required, select the Presentation check box and add an associated presentation
indicator (it is possible to perform this step only once, this is the default choice for a
calculated indicator).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-78 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation is:
In the case of basic indicators, set as unchecked and one stored temporal indicator is
added
In the case of calculated indicators, added with no temporal indicators.
Perform the following:
1. Choose the unit, and the precision to which the indicator be rounded up.
2. Choose a Percentage display (or not).
3. Choose whether the presentation indicator is Visible (or not).
4. Add a reliability indicator.
5. The system computes and displays the availability domain. If necessary, deselect
some part of it, but ensure it is not empty. Also, you can select/unselect all
periodicities of a row or all object types of a column, by clicking on the column / row
header.
Result: The parameters of the presentation indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-79
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Name field may be left empty if there is only one temporal aggregation and no
presentation; in this case the temporal aggregation appears with the same name as the
indicator.
Type the Description Extension
Choose the unit, and the precision to which the indicator be rounded up
Choose a Percentage display (or not)
Choose whether the Temporal Aggregation is Visible (or not)
Select between Stored and Calculated temporal aggregation. The default choice is
calculated.
For stored temporal aggregation, the system checks whether the maximum number of
customer stored indicators is reached (for stored aggregation only)
If yes, the operation is rejected; if no, perform the following:
Choose a temporal aggregation function
To create a busy hour reference indicator with a maximum stored temporal
aggregation, refer to Procedure 9-4: Create busy hour reference indicator
(p. 9-64).
Choose the relevant hours for the aggregation: all hours or just working hours
If required, add a reliability indicator
In case you choose as reliability indicator a system indicator, backward
compatibility will not be supported.
Add an indicator group. Perform one of the following options.
Select a predefined compatible group With the same PM type, and collecting
network element, from the dropdown list
group.
The predefined dropdown list contains
only the groups with the spatial
aggregation path which includes the
source network object(s) of the counter
used in the formula, in a hierarchical
order.
Create your own group Click on Add Group.
The Add Group window opens.
Type the appropriate indicator group
name.
Select the Spatial Aggregation Path from
the dropdown list, which includes the
object types of the source network objects
of the counters used in the formula.
Click on OK to associate the spatial
aggregation path with the newly created
indicator group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-80 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For calculated temporal aggregation, perform the following:
Add a formula that calculates the indicator. The same possibilities exist as for the
formula of calculated indicator.
If required, add a reliability indicator.
The system computes the availability domain. If necessary, deselect some parts of
it, but ensure it is not empty. Also, you can select/unselect all periodicities of a
row or all object types of a column, by clicking on the column / row header.
Result: The parameters for the temporal aggregation of the indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-81
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The parameters for the thresholds and sampling of the indicator are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-82 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.2: Create indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A progress window appears and the Continue in Background button is
available, refer to Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option (p. 9-89).
The indicator is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-83
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.3: Create customer indicator by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Indicator Editor window, select the indicator from which to create a copy.
Result: The indicator is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The Indicator Properties panel appears with a default name and editable
properties panel.
The name of the copied indicator respects the <oldname>_copy_n format, where n
is a number.
To have a new name instead of <oldname>_copy_n, you have to modify the name
in temporal aggregation indicator panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: A confirmation message appears, asking if you want to create the indicator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: A progress window appears and the Continue in Background button is
available, refer to Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option (p. 9-89).
The customer indicator is created by copy.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-84 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.4: Edit customer indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on
Result: The Indicator Properties panel appears with editable fields except for the
name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: A confirmation message appears, asking if you want to create the indicator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: A progress window appears and the Continue in Background button is
available, refer to Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option (p. 9-89).
The customer indicator is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-85
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.5: Edit indicator threshold / sampling values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on
Result: The current threshold and sampling values along with other indicator
properties are displayed in the Threshold & Sampling panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: The modified indicator threshold / sampling value parameters are updated.
The modified threshold / sampling values are stored in the customer indicator
dictionary.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-86 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.6: Delete indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-87
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.7: Export indicator
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more indicators from the indicator tree of the Indicator editor.
Result: The indicator(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the indicator(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is done successfully.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected indicators are exported in an xml customer indicators dictionary
containing only the selection and all the customer indicators involved in the definition
of the selected indicators (in a recursive manner). The file is exported in the location
defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The exported file can be re-imported on another system at the same plug installation level
(same system dictionaries) using NPO Import/Export Management web pages. Refer to
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import QoS dictionary using GUI
procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-88 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Indicator Editor. Please refer to Procedure 9-9: Use indicator editor
(p. 9-73) to create/copy/edit or delete indicator.
Result: The Indicator Type window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: A progress window appears with the button Continue in background.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
If Then
You click on OK The following message appears:
While the procesing is on-going, you can use all
Analysis Desktop features but you should avoid
using the Indicator Editor
(user@serveripaddress). If you want to use it
anyway, please press Cancel before starting any
new operation. But in such a case, if the on-
going operation fails, then all the associated
inputs will be lost.
Click on OK.
The Indicator Editor window reappears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 9-89
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use counters and indicators Procedure 9-9.8: Continue in background option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Then
You click on Cancel The operation continues in background.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-90 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
10 Manage parameters
10
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage radio parameters.
Contents
Presentation 10-1
Display logical / design parameter properties 10-3
Procedure 10-1: Display parameters 10-9
Procedure 10-2: Propagate parameters 10-10
Manage parameters 10-10
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_PARAM_<TECHNO>_LICENSE must be installed so that the
administrator can create parameters for a given technology (GSM, W-CDMA. LTE).
If the MUSE_PARAM_HISTORY_LICENSE is not installed, then the history of
the parameters is not kept.
Radio parameters are used as follows.
Parameter Description
Tuning (for example, changing parameters) The NPO allows you to:
Display parameters
Compare parameters between cells
Show the history, in particular to correlate
it with QoS variation
Compare with planned value
Compare with referenced value
Perform tuning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 10-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
QoS interpretation and reporting Parameters are taken into account when
comparing cells, object zones, and
classifications between themselves.
Radio parameters are used for QoS interpretation and reporting. Parameters are taken into
account when comparing cells, object zones, and classifications between themselves.
Parameters are also taken into account (for example the number of TRX) when computing
some indicators.
Two types of parameters are defined:
Design parameters, that define the radio network architecture in term of coverage and
mobility capability
Design parameters can have the following values:
An operational value that is in use in the network. The value is retrieved from the
OMC-R
A planned value.
Design parameters can have four sub-levels in the family hierarchy.
For W-CDMA and LTE, the design parameters are not available.
Logical parameters, also called telecom algorithm parameters, used to optimize the
telecom behavior.
Logical parameter can have the following values:
An operational value that is in use in the network. The value is retrieved from the
OMC-R
A historical value that results from the value of the operational parameter in the
past
A forecast value that results from a tuning session and is used to change values in
the network
A reference value which is the default value of a parameter for a given network
object. This value depends on the network object configuration, i.e. values of
other parameters (for example, for GSM cells, on the cell type and cell class:
urban, rural, number of TRX)
A planed value coming from the planning tool.
Logical parameters can have four sub-levels in the family hierarchy.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Display logical / design parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 10-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Display logical / design parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Display logical / design parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 10-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Display logical / design parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 10-2 Example design parameters properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Display logical / design parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 10-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Display logical / design parameter properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Procedure 10-1: Display parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To display the values of the parameters, select them and the appropriate network object(s)
Result: The required objects are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 You can customize the way parameters are displayed, by changing the user preferences.
Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences (p. 26-2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 10-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Procedure 10-2: Propagate parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected parameter and drop it to required function tab. The mouse pointer
changes to
Result: Depending on how the parameter Display time before a tab is raised and
made active is set as a user preference, the target counter tree:
Is automatically displayed, or
You have to switch to the target counter tree to view it.
The view is auto-scrolled until the first selected object is visible.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Manage parameters
Import parameter dictionary
Parameter dictionaries describe all the supported parameters for the managed network
objects. They are specific for each managed technology and release.
For more information about importing parameter dictionaries into the NPO data
warehouse, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameters
dictionary using GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Manage parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter historical data purge
For performance and storage space reasons, a regular data purge of the oldest historical
values is performed.
The purge process is launched every night after the daily import of operational values. It
deletes every history records that contain a date older of a specified number of days than
the current date.
See PM data purge (p. 9-27).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 10-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Manage parameters Manage parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
11 Use reference values
11
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of reference values.
Contents
Presentation 11-1
Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values 11-8
Procedure 11-2: Create user defined reference values 11-10
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_PARAM_HISTORY_LICENSE must be installed, so that the
history of parameters is kept.
Definition
Reference values are Excel files that express the default value that a parameter for a given
network object should have.
These values depend on the network object configuration, i.e. values of other parameters
(for example, for GSM cells, on the cell type and cell class: urban, rural, number of
TRX).
Alcatel-Lucent publishes reference values for the parameters of its equipment. Some
operators directly use Alcatel-Lucent reference values, others change them to better suit
their needs.
Note: For W-CDMA, the customer can create some, but no reference values from
Alcatel-Lucent.
Reference values are not available for LTE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 11-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Characteristics
A parameter dictionary can contain only one reference values Excel files.
The file is mono-release, unlike rules files that are multi-releases.
The .xls reference values file can contain several sheets: each sheet contains reference
values for one type of object or relation.
Each sheet contains:
A list of a parameters for a given object type
For one type of objects, several sheets can be created and parameters can be grouped
as wished by the operator, but one sheet contains only reference values for one object
type.
Each parameter can have a ParamVersionInfo for a given release and a given object
type. The Parameter Version Info describes the parameter and the object on which the
parameter is applied.
A list of criteria that defines the conditions when the reference value apply
The reference values themselves.
On the fields, some parameters may be changed for local optimization (tuning).
That is why the reference value is composed of:
A minimum value - the tuning should not go below this value
A maximum value - the tuning should not go above this value
A reference value - this should be the value used when the cell was created.
Note: The layout used by Excel (font, bold, italic, cell colors, cell border, comments)
has no impact on NPO.
File header
Each sheet of the .xls reference values contains a header in the following form:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The header stops when column A contains the keyword start (case insensitive).
Some parameters are only meaningful on the first sheet; others are defined on each sheet.
Column header
Below the rule file header, the first two lines contain the columns header.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 11-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the two lines of the columns header, column A contains the header for the column
containing parameter names (e.g. the label 'Parameters').
Columns B, C and D contain the header for the default values columns (e.g. label
'Default' on the first line and labels 'min' 'ref' and 'max' on the second line). Theses
headers are only for presentation purposes.
Starting at column E, cells are grouped three by three: for minimum, reference and
maximum value. For each group, the first line contains a criteria expression, that must
match the grammar described in Expression grammar (p. 11-5). The second line is only
for presentation purpose (labels 'min' 'ref' and 'max').
All following columns are grouped three by three, and contain the following:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the reference value is given but the minimum and maximum are empty it means
that, if the criteria matches, the parameter has no minimum and maximum values.
If the three are empty it means that, even if the criteria matches, it is not taken into
account and the next criteria (on the left) is checked. The default reference values
(minimum, maximum or the three) can be empty, in this case, nothing is returned.
Expression grammar
The following grammar is used to check reference values and rules expressions.
Tokens
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 11-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Square brackets are not supported.
Basic operators
Plus +
Minus -
Multiply *
Divide /
NOT NOT
AND AND
AND is evaluated before OR condition.
OR OR
Note: Do not use any kind of brackets (round or square) for the logical evaluation.
Expression functions
EQ =
NE <>
LT <
LE <=
GE >=
GT >
LIKE LIKE
BETWEEN BETWEEN
Productions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples
(((IFBAND1+1)*2)-2) / (IFBAND2-IFBAND2+2) = IFBAND1
(IFBAND1*2) / 2 = IFBAND1 AND IFBAND1 <> IFBAND2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 11-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network elements (e.g.: BSCells) and Design parameters, then:
Drag and drop them in the Tabular / Graphical Viewer, or
From the menu bar, select View -> Execute View... or
Press Ctrl+Q.
Result: The Execution Context window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the appropriate information, as presented in Execution context (p. 3-19), selecting
Hour periodicity, the appropriate Date and Time.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Procedure 11-1: Compare different reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the Parameter Reference values, Min Reference values and Max Reference values, a
tool tip is available on the displayed value, providing the related value selection criterion
from the associated dictionary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Legend window, in the Parameter Comparison frame, choose to compare the
appropriate Source and Target values (e.g.: All values to Reference, or values before and
after a migration or upgrade).
Result: A window opens, displaying the comparison.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate / inverse axis of view (p. 18-71) to filter by parameter.
Result: Parameter names are now positioned in the rows of the table, while the
network elements (cells) are in the columns.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the Legend window, choose to hide the OK values by selecting the Hide checkbox for
green color.
Result: The remaining values are those for which at least one cell the value is not
equal to the default value.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 11-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use reference values Procedure 11-2: Create user defined reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: To delete a file, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Delete parameter reference values using GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
12 12 operator reference
Use
values (ORV)
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of operator network reference values.
Contents
Presentation 12-1
Procedure 12-1: Save as operator reference 12-4
Import / update / export / delete user defined operator reference values 12-5
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_OPERATOR_REF_VALUES_LICENSE must be installed.
Definition
The Operator Reference Values allow the operator defining explicit reference values for
all object instances as well as defining also a Reference Topology (including the number
of cells, the number of adjacencies, the number of TRX per cell, and so on).
The ORV data can be populated by set of CSV files delivered into a zip archive file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 12-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure provides an example of the ORV parameter dictionary for GSM.
To download some examples of the ORV parameter dictionary files, refer to Procedure
28-1: Download NPO example files (p. 28-2).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 12-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Procedure 12-1: Save as operator reference
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or several network objects from the Topology browser, then:
Right click and select Save as Operator Reference, OR
From the menu bar, select Topology ->Save as Operator Reference.
Result: The following message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: All the values of design and logical parameters of the selected objects become
Operator Network Reference values. They replace previous existing Operator
Network reference values for this object if they exist.
A notification is generated in the system indicating that a new ORV data is saved in
the database for the selected object.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Import / update / export / delete user defined operator
reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 12-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use operator reference values (ORV) Import / update / export / delete user defined operator
reference values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
12-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
13 Use rules
13
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of rules.
Contents
Presentation 13-1
Display Rule Properties 13-10
Procedure 13-1: Execute rules 13-13
Procedure 13-2: Create user defined rules 13-14
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_CUSTOMER_RULES_LICENSE must be installed, so that the
rules where the supplier is customer can be imported and exported.
Definition
Rules are Excel files that express the dependency between two or more parameters of a
given object, and are stored in the Oracle database.
To indicate when a rule is applicable, conditions and expressions on other parameters are
defined inside it.
Classification
Depending on their supplier, three types of rules are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 13-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Characteristics
A parameter dictionary can contain several rule Excel files, but a file contains rules for
only one dictionary.
The .xls rule file can contain several sheets: each sheet contains rules for a given
dictionary, a given supplier, and a given object type.
A rule file can be:
Multi-type, one type per sheet, but types can also be split into several files
Multi-supplier (e.g. one sheet for Standard rules and one sheet for Alcatel-Lucent
rules), but rules from different supplier types can also be split into several files
Multi-release (unlike reference values files that are mono-release).
The name of a rule file is unique for a dictionary and object type.
Rules can be checked:
On objects in the Analysis Desktop
When applying a Tuning Session.
File header
Each sheet of the .xls rule contains a header in the following form.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter names are case insensitive. If a parameter name is present several times, only
the first occurrence is taken into account.
Comments are ignored.
The header stops when column A contains the keyword start (case insensitive).
Some parameters are only meaningful on the first sheet; others are defined on each sheet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 13-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column header
Below the rule file header, the first two lines contain the columns header.
The first eight columns (from A to H) contain the names of the rule attributes.
The names contained in the header cells are not important themselves, it is only the order
of the columns that counts.
The rules attributes are defined in the following order:
Name
Rule Type
Severity
Visible
Function
Rule Expression
Description
Rule Condition.
The next columns (starting with column I) define additional conditional parameters for
rules.
The first line contains a variable set of merged cells. Each set has a variable number of
merged cells. It contains an object parameter name, for example for GSM,
CELL_CLASS. The number of sets itself is not limited.
On the second line, for each set of merged cells, for example, for each object parameter,
each individual cell contains a parameter value, for example, URBAN, SUBURBAN, etc.
Each column represents a specific condition on an object parameter value, of the form
<parameter name>='<parameter value>, for example for GSM,
CELL_TYPE='CONCENTRIC'.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rule data
After the columns header, the next lines contain the rule data, one rule per line.
The first eight columns (from A to H) contain the following rule attributes:
Description Mandatory
The name of the rule. Yes
It must be unique among all rules.
The type of the rule (e.g. System or Expert), it can actually be any free text. No
The rule severity. A value among (case insensitive): Yes
ERROR
WARNING
The visibility: if any text is present, (e.g. X) it means true. No
(default is
false)
The function, i.e. the family and subfamilies in the form: No
<family> / <subfamily1><subfamily2><subfamily3><subfamily4>.
The number of sub-families can be from zero to four. The family itself is optional.
The description of the rule. No
The rule expression. It must validate the grammar given in the Annex. Yes
The rule condition that defines when the rule applies. It must validate the grammar No
given in the Annex.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 13-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The next columns (starting with column I) define additional conditional parameters for
rules.
Depending on the Columns header, each cell corresponds to a specific condition on a
parameter value (e.g.for GSM: CELL_CLASS = 'CONCENTRIC'). If the cell contains
any text (for example, X) it means that the condition must be applied for the rule.
For each rule, a cross in a cell means that the conditional parameter must have the
corresponding value to make the rule applicable.
If some cells are checked for several values of the same parameter the rule applies if the
conditional parameter have one of the checked values.
If a condition (and specific conditional parameters) is false for an object, it means that the
rule cannot be applied on that object, and the rule result is N/A (and not true or false,
whatever the rule expression value for that object).
Rule expressions and conditions are formulas containing references to parameters of the
network object. It can also contain selectors to use parameters of a child or a parent
object, or to use parameters of the source or target objects in the case of relations
(adjacencies).
Example for LTE:
S:CLASS = URBAN (S for Source)
T:CLASS = URBAN (T for Target)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example for GSM and W-CDMA:
BSC:Release = XYZ
S:CELL_CLASS = URBAN (S for Source)
T:CELL_CLASS = URBAN(T for Target)
In the same way, hard coded conditional parameters (for example for GSM ,
CELL_CLASS, RELEASE) must match the parameter expressions defined in the
grammar. They may also use selectors like S:CELL_CLASS, i.e. the parameter
CELL_CLASS of the source cell.
Rule evaluation
When executing a view that contains rules, the parameter values from the rules conditions
and expressions are evaluated with operational, historical, planned, or forecast values
depending on the view execution context. The execution context is set in the same way as
for views containing parameters.
The temporal part of the availability domain (list of periodicity) is fixed and is common
to all rules; it is configurable in a configuration file.
The spatial part of the availability domain of a rule is the associated object type of the
rule (e.g. CELL2G).
The availability domain of a rule is not computed from availability domain of parameters
used in the rule. This means that if the user chooses an execution context that is not valid
for one of the parameters, the result of the rule is N/A.
When checking a tuning session, the parameter values from the rules conditions and
expressions are evaluated with operational or forecast values, depending on the given
tuning session.
In both cases, the evaluation of the rule may involve getting parameter values of other
related objects (operational or forecast when checking a tuning session, operational or
historical when executing a rules view, in the same execution context).
The criteria in the .xls file is evaluated from right to left.
A rule cannot be checked on an object (the rule result is N / A) if:
The rule condition (and specific conditional parameters) is false for that object
At least one parameter used in the rule expression has no value for that object in the
given execution context
The rule condition or rule expression cannot be evaluated (e.g. division by zero or
comparison between numeric and nonnumeric values). In this case, a warning must be
logged.
Depending on the Severity value, the following icons are defined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 13-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Highlighting
The operator can highlight the view based on rules results.
This case is an extension of the Highlight in view case.
Criteria Color
Rule result is N / A Black
Rule result is true Green
Rule result is false and the rule is of type Warning Orange
Rule result is false and the rule is of type Error Red
Expression grammar
The following grammar is used to check reference values and rules expressions.
Tokens
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Square brackets are not supported.
Basic operators
Plus +
Minus -
Multiply *
Divide /
NOT NOT
AND AND
AND is evaluated before OR condition.
OR OR
Note: Do not use any kind of brackets (round or square) for the logical evaluation.
Expression functions
EQ =
NE <>
LT <
LE <=
GE >=
GT >
LIKE LIKE
BETWEEN BETWEEN
Productions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples
(((IFBAND1+1)*2)-2) / (IFBAND2-IFBAND2+2) = IFBAND1
(IFBAND1*2) / 2 = IFBAND1 AND IFBAND1 <> IFBAND2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Display Rule Properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Procedure 13-1: Execute rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network object(s), and the rules or view(s) containing the rule(s), then drag and
drop them in the Tabular / Graphical Viewer.
Note that rules can be applied only on operational values.
Result: The Execution Context window appears. Enter the appropriate information,
as presented in Execution context (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 13-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use rules Procedure 13-2: Create user defined rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: To delete a rule, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
Delete parameter rules using GUI.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
13-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
14 Use events
14
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the use of events.
Contents
Presentation 14-1
Display event properties 14-4
Procedure 14-1: Display events 14-7
Procedure 14-2: Display event synthesis 14-16
Presentation
Events are correlated to the QoS evolution of the network and show when key
information of a cell is changed.
Events are defined per technology (GSM, W-CDMA, LTE). The events definitions
contain a unique name, an availability domain, and a family.
The family attribute represents the method that is used to compute the event. Two families
are defined: parameter (modification of current or planned parameter, e.g identifier, BSC,
frequency) and topology (object creation / deletion, e.g Move BTS).
Events can be:
base events available (only) at the corresponding level where they have occurred
aggregated events (raised when similar event is raised for at least one sub-object)
that enables to show at upper topology level that an event has occurred for one or
several objects.
It is possible to have more than one aggregation for a given base event (e.g.
aggregated events at BSC and BTS levels for a Cell 2G base event).
Internal events are defined on historicized network configuration data, such as logical /
design parameter modifications and / or topology modifications to detect significant
changes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Events may be displayed:
On a synthetic view like a dashboard where each event is represented by a graphical
symbol
In reports or in a dedicated tabular view.
Note: Only the following events are available for W-CDMA: cell, adjacency, network
element creation / deletion.
Only Events for which the Visible property is set to True are displayed for any user.
NonVisible events are displayed only for the Administrator.
A predefined set of events per technology is defined by Alcatel-Lucent. These are called
system events and cannot be updated or deleted by the user.
Aggregated events permit event happening at lower topology levels being visible at upper
topology levels (for example, showing at BSC level if some events have been raised at
corresponding CELL2G level).
The following table of icons contains the system icons provided by Alcatel-Lucent.
Depending on the technology, they are displayed or not (BCCH / BSIC Changes is a
GSM event for instance).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Display event properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Display event properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1: Display events
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Procedure 14-1.4: Use tabular mode for executed event (p. 14-12).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Procedure 14-1.5: Use tabular mode for standard view: multi-object comparison
(p. 14-13).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 14-1.6: Use tabular mode for standard view: mono-object evolution
(p. 14-14).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 14-1.7: Use tabular mode for standard view: multi-object evolution
(p. 14-15).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.1: Execute Events
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network object(s), and the event(s) or view(s) containing the event(s), then drag
and drop them in the Executed View browser.
Result: The Execution Context window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.2: Open events details window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Button Description
Name
Propagate To propagate the selected lines (CTRL+A to select all the lines) in the
function and object trees.
The parameters are propagated in design, logical trees depending on the
selection and in the tuning tree when the parameters are tunable.
The object on which the detail is opened is propagated in the
corresponding object tree.
Close To close the Event Details window.
Help To go to the online help for the current window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.2: Open events details window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This window contains the list of sub-objects of Object 1 that have raised the event and
the corresponding event at object type level. The Propagate button permits to
propagate the objects of the selected lines in the corresponding topology object tree.
In case of multiple events in a single view table cell, with normal and aggregated
events, the detail window will have the two tabs:
The first tab is the current existing one
The second tab is the new view with sub-objects.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.3: Legend for events
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.4: Use tabular mode for executed event
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select ALL_EVENTS.
Note: For a multi-object comparison view, in the Execution Context window, the
evolution must be chosen for only one date.
Result: The matrix representation of the view is:
The rows represent the network objects
The event cells contain an icon representing the event if one or more occurrences
of the event exist; they are empty otherwise.
The cells display a synthesis of all event occurrences where each event type is
represented by an icon.
The columns define the dates.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.5: Use tabular mode for standard view:
multi-object comparison
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.6: Use tabular mode for standard view:
mono-object evolution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-1.7: Use tabular mode for standard view:
multi-object evolution
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2: Display event synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.1: Display event synthesis in tabular mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view (p. 18-76) and click on the Execution
Context tab, OR
Select one or several network object(s) and one or several function(s), then drag and
drop them in the Tabular Viewer.
Result: The Execution Context window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on:
Update View, in case of executed view, OR
Execute, in case of drag and drop mechanism.
.
Result: An additional row is added at the bottom of the tabular view:
The cells of this row contain an x if an event occurrence exists for the given day
and the given network object.
You can then view details about it in two modes:
By double clicking on X, or
By right clicking on X and selecting Event Details.
This is applicable for any type of event that applies for the selected type of object.
If there is no event occurrence, the cell is filled with N/A or an empty value
according to the user preferences; see Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.1: Display event synthesis in tabular mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.2: Display event synthesis in graphical mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view (p. 18-76) and click on the Execution
Context tab, OR
Select one or several network object(s) and one or several function(s), then drag and
drop them in the Graphical Viewer.
Result: The Execution Context window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on:
Update View, if it was used an executed view
Execute, if it was used the drag and drop mechanism.
Result: The event synthesis appears below the regular graph in the form of a bar
divided in cells. This is also called one-line-event.
Each cell represents a day and is aligned on the day boundaries of the X-axis of the
graph above it.
If an event occurred on the given day, the cell is colored in blue. Otherwise, the cell is
not colored.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 14-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use events Procedure 14-2.2: Display event synthesis in graphical mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
15 Use free fields
15
Overview
Purpose
This section presents an overview of free fields.
Contents
Presentation 15-1
Display free field properties 15-4
Manage free fields 15-6
Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields 15-7
Presentation
Definition
For each customer object type, a set of additional free fields can be defined. Then, an
object can be associated with a set of free fields values.
Free fields can be generalized for all network objects, but are basically used with the
cells.
They can be displayed as design parameters, used in criteria for working zone, object
zone and in classification.
Free Fields are displayed in alphabetic order and no user-defined classification can be
created for them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 15-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Free fields file header
The header part is the first line of the file.
For the specific case of GSM cells, the header is composed as below:
FREE FIELD;<optional comment>
For generic cases, the header is composed as below:
FREE FIELD;<optional comment>;<TYPE>
where <TYPE> is the type of objects contained in the file.
Example: FREE FIELD;CELL3G
Example in the case of W-CDMA: FREE FIELD;RNC
Free fields file label
For the specific case of GSM cells:
The second line defines the used external IDs and the names of free fields.
There are two ways of identifying cells with two different configurations of external IDs:
MCC / MNC / CI configuration
In a CI configuration, the label part is composed of the keywords (CELL_MCC,
CELL_MNC, CELL_ID) followed by free fields name, separated by semicolons:
CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;CELL_ID;<name1>;<name2>; etc
Example: CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;CELL_ID;Address; ZIP_Code
MCC / MNC / LAC / CI configuration
In a LACCI configuration, the label part is composed of the keywords (CELL_MCC,
CELL_MNC, LAC_ID, CELL_ID) followed by the free fields name, separated by
semicolons:
CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;LAC_ID;CELL_ID;<name1>;<name2>; etc
Example: CELL_MCC;CELL_MNC;LAC_ID;CELL_ID;Address;ZIP_Code
The external IDs of GSM cells is constructed from this information.
For generic cases, the header is composed as below:
The second line is composed of the keyword OEXID followed by the names of the free
fields, separated by semicolons.
The label part is composed of the name of the type, followed by the free fields name,
separated by semicolons:
OEXID;<name1>;<name2>; etc
Example: OEXID;Address;ZIP_Code
Example in the case of W-CDMA: OEXID;town;color
Free fields file value
The other lines of the free fields file form the value part. Each line describes the values of
free fields for one cell.
For the specific case of GSM Cells:
The line is introduced by the cell identifiers followed by values of free fields, separated
by semicolons:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 15-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
<MCC>;<MNC>;[<LAC_ID>];<CI>;<val1>;<val2>; etc
The LAC_ID is contained depending on if it is present or not in the label part.
In case the MNC is on 2 digits, you must pad MNC on 3 digits by putting an F
character as prefix for MNC, in all external IDs where MNC is used. For example, if
MNC is 01, then all external IDs using MNC will contain it as F01. For example, if
MCC=230, MNC=01, LAC=100, CI=7 then cell's external ID will be 230/F01/100/7.
Note that the number of values must be equal to the number of labels declared in label
part.
Empty lines are skipped with no warning. The last line is read even if it does not end with
a carriage return.
Example:
2;3;12450;4 Main Street;92000
5;3;13200;3 Downtown blvd;06000
For generic cases:
The line is introduced by the object external identifier followed by the values of the free
fields, separated by semicolons:
<OEXID>;<val1>;<val2>; etc
Note that the number of values must be equal to the number of labels declared in the label
part.
Empty lines are skipped with no warning. The last line is read even if it does not end with
a carriage return.
Example:
000001 / 000005;4 Main Street;92000
000001 / 000006;3 Downtown blvd;06000
Example in the case of W-CDMA:
RNC2005;Nantes;Yellow
RNC_112;Rennes;Red
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Display free field properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table provides an overview of the parameters and their corresponding
descriptions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 15-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Manage free fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate cell(s) and the free field(s), then drag and drop them in the
Executed View browser.
Result: The Execution Context window appears. Enter the appropriate information,
as presented in Execution context (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 15-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use free fields Procedure 15-1: Execute free fields
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
16 Use user note
16
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to use user notes.
Contents
Presentation 16-1
Display user note 16-2
Procedure 16-1: Create user note 16-3
Procedure 16-2: Edit user note 16-4
Procedure 16-3: Delete user note 16-5
Presentation
User notes are user defined comments associated with topology objects (network objects
or object zones) and functions.
User Notes are visible to all users and are clearly visible in topology or function trees, and
are indicated by a yellow icon which is attached to the object.
One or several user notes can be associated per one or several objects.
All users can see the user notes, but only those having the corresponding FAD can modify
or delete them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 16-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Display user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-1: Create user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the comment (as free text) and the select one of the following options.
Note: The cell user note message is limited at 4096 characters. The text area is
scrollable if the contents of the user note are large.
If Click on
You selected one object Apply
You selected several objects and you want to Apply to Current Object
apply a same or different text for one object
You selected several objects and you want to Apply to All Objects
apply a same or different text for all objects
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 16-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-2: Edit user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the appropriate topology object(s) (network object or object zone) or
function(s) that has a user note attached, and select User Note -> Edit....
Result: The Edit User Note window opens with the previous user note content
selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-3: Delete user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or several topology objects (network objects or object zones) or one or several
functions that have a user note.
Note: You can select multiple user notes for removal.
Result: The required objects or functions are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The user note is removed and a notification of user note deletion is sent to all
connected users.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 16-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use user note Procedure 16-3: Delete user note
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
17 Use favorites
17
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to use favorites.
Contents
Presentation 17-1
Procedure 17-1: Select favorite function 17-3
Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions 17-4
Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites 17-6
Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites 17-7
Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites 17-9
Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites 17-10
Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder 17-12
Procedure 17-8: Import favorites 17-13
Procedure 17-9: Export favorites 17-15
Presentation
For a friendlier and quicker navigation to the user preferred functions, they can be added
to favorite list of functions. Thus, when a function is defined as being a favorite function,
it can be quickly retrieved from the popup menu, instead of having to search for it in the
function tree.
Groups and sub-groups of favorites can be defined for a better customizing. There is one
list of groups / sub-groups / favorite functions per Function Type per Mode (i.e. Favorite
Indicators for Cell 3G, Favorite Indicators for RNC, Favorites Logical Parameter for Cell
3G, etc).
The favorites definition - including groups and sub-groups, is dedicated to one user (not
shared between users).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 17-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of groups and sub-groups is unique for each mode and function type. The same
Favorite function can be added to different groups and sub-groups.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-1: Select favorite function
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Navigate through the Favorites popups list of favorites, and select the desired favorite
function to display.
Result: When a favorite function is selected any prior selections on the function tree
are maintained only if Add favorite to current selection is set as true in the user
preferences; otherwise the selections are lost and the tree is scrolled down to the
selected favorite function.
The Whole Group selection contains all the favorites under the group.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 17-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-2: Add a function to favorite functions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
Result: The function(s) is (are) added as favorite function(s), in the selected group or
sub-group of favorites.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 17-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Add to Favorites or Organize Favorites window, select a group under the new
group / sub-group to be created.
Result: By default the root node (i.e. Favorites) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Group Name field, type the name of the group / sub-group to be created.
The group name must be unique, and the sub-group name must be unique within the
group.
Result: The group or sub-group name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
Result: The Favorites tree is updated and the new group / sub-group is selected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The current name of the group is highlighted and becomes editable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The name of the group is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The favorite / group / sub-group of favorites is deleted. in the case of a group
removal, all the favorite functions it contained are also deleted.
The favorites tree is refreshed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 17-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the menu bar, select Data -> Favorites -> Oganize....
Result: The Organize Favorites window appears.
The displayed favorites are those of the current mode and Function Type (active
function tree).
The Mode field displays the mode for which the organize favorites opens. On mode
navigation, the first function tab of the mode is activated. You can change the mode
by selecting a different mode from the list. Only modes of the active standard and
only the visible modes are displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-6: Organize favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Function Tabs contains all the functions of the selected mode. Only the visible
tabs on the function browser are displayed. By changing the function tab, the favorites
of that function are loaded and the function tab from which organize favorites is
called appears.
The Favorites Hierarchy tree displays favorites organized by group and sub-group.
The tree is scrollable vertically and horizontally.
The following actions are available from this window:
Procedure 17-3: Create group to add favorites (p. 17-6)
Procedure 17-4: Rename group of favorites (p. 17-7)
Procedure 17-5: Delete favorite / group of favorites (p. 17-9)
Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder (p. 17-12)
Procedure 17-8: Import favorites (p. 17-13)
Procedure 17-9: Export favorites (p. 17-15).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 17-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-7: Move favorite / group of favorites to folder
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Continue the dragging process to an appropriate group, where the mouse pointer is .
Result: The favorite / group is moved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-8: Import favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 17-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-8: Import favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Import Favorites window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for the favorites .xml file to import, then click on Import.
Result: The file is imported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-9: Export favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for a location to export the selected favorite, then click on Export.
Result: The favorite is exported in .xml format. Its corresponding mode and function
types are also saved in the .xml file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 17-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Use favorites Procedure 17-9: Export favorites
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
17-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
18 Views
18
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the management of view templates. It describes how to create, edit,
display, and delete a view template.
Contents
Presentation 18-2
Display view properties 18-11
Procedure 18-1: View template editor 18-21
Procedure 18-2: Execute view 18-42
Procedure 18-3: Edit executed view interactively 18-53
Procedure 18-4: Edit executed view using dialog box 18-75
Use executed view 18-79
Highlight in view 18-83
Show legend 18-85
Sort 18-89
Filter in view 18-90
Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values 18-95
Change view display type 18-98
Resize 18-98
Procedure 18-5: Copy to system clipboard 18-99
Copy executed view 18-99
Duplicate executed view 18-99
Procedure 18-6: Rename executed view 18-100
Procedure 18-7: Save executed view as template 18-101
Close executed view(s) 18-101
Procedure 18-8: Export executed views 18-103
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
Definition
View enables the user to display results coming from any analysis service (e.g. functions)
in a tabular way or graphical way. A view contains the network objects, functions, and
execution context (period, interval, sampling, interpolation, reliability options). The limit
for the number of functions inside a view is 500.
A view template defines a set of indicators / parameters.
A view can be created:
By selecting network objects and view templates, then executing them on an
execution context (period, interval, sampling, interpolation, reliability), or
Interactively, by selecting network objects and indicators / counters / parameters /
events / rules / synthetic diagnosis, then dragging and dropping them into a viewer
browser.
Only the Equipment view cannot be created interactively.
The default limit for the maximum objects in a view in the view browser is 5000.
A view is also known as an Executed View and appears in the View Viewer.
The default limit for the maximum number of views, both executed and in progress
executions, in the report browser is 20.
To change Modify
The limit of 5000 objects Modify the following parameters:
The analysis.desktop.objects.views.limit
parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
The MAXSIZE parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/qos/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/
maat/qos/QoSResource.cfg
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To change Modify
The limit of 20 views in the Modify the following parameters:
view browser (both executed The
and in progress executions) analysis.desktop.views.inside.report.limit
parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
The MAX_TABLE_GRAPH_TABS parameter from the
following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
The MAX_VIEW_TEMPLATE_SIZE parameter from the
following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
The limit of 20 views inside Modify the MAX_VIEW_TEMPLATE_SIZE parameter from the
the report following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
The limit of 500 functions Modify the following parameters:
inside a view The
analysis.desktop.functions.inside.view.limit
parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
The MAX_GRAPH_DATA_LIMIT parameter from the
following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/
alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_param.cfg
In order for the updates to be taken into account in Analysis Desktop, the Analysis
Desktop must be closed, then re-opened.
Important! Changing these parameters is not under Alcatel-Lucent responsibility.
Putting higher values then the values tested in Alcatel-Lucent labs may cause higher
response time or even request that do not answer.
Classification
The views can be displayed in one of the following modes.
Mode Definition
Tabular Displays the exact values of analysis services outputs in a table.
Graphical Displays analysis outputs with curves and histograms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Four types of views are defined:
Standard
Vector
Matrix
Equipment.
Apart from the specific case of Equipment, views can also be grouped into four types of
evolution and comparison:
Mono-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Evolution View
Multi-Object Comparison View
Mono-Object Distribution View.
Note: Mono-Object Distribution Views are not available in WiMAX.
In the following table, the Number of Objects refers to the number of network objects
used when creating the executed view. The Period Covered refers to the date(s) entered in
the execution context when creating the executed view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Mode Definition
Table mode, with all attached functions The table mode displays values of analysis
services outputs.
Optional rows and columns (such as Total,
Weight, Average and Order) may be displayed
in tabular views (depending on the choices
made at view template definition time).
Graphic mode, if the graphic representation is The graphical mode is defined from a subset
defined in the view template. of functions defined in the tabular mode.
The graphic mode displays analysis outputs
with curves, histograms with scales and
legend.
Only one mode appears at a time for each view. Indicators or Parameters may have
different graphical properties (legend) according to the mode used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure provides an example of the differences between table and graphic
modes for a view template.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Below the daily periodicity, the timestamp are displayed using the user time
zone and above or at the daily periodicity, the day / week / month timestamp are those
corresponding to NPO time zone.
Figure 18-2 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns
Figure 18-3 Matrix view templates without grid with independent columns
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-4 Matrix view templates without grid without independent columns
Figure 18-5 Matrix view templates with grid without independent columns
Figure 18-6 Matrix view templates with grid with independent columns
Interval values
The interval values entered by the user are rounded according to the nbAfterPoint
attribute of the matrix indicator. This rounded value is the one used and displayed for the
interval bound, and not the input value.
Per default, min and max values are set to 0. If min or max changes, the corresponding
value is changed in the distribution scale, without changing colors, and other interval
values are updated according to the interval distribution function.
The update of min / max values is done:
In the distribution scale when modifying their values in static sections
In static sections when changing theirs values in the distribution scale.
In static distributed QoS views, interval values are written in black in the view legend.
Switching from Dynamic distribution mode to Static distribution mode and vice versa
does not change the number of steps or the colors of the distribution scale:
If the user changes the mode from custom distribution to linear / exponential /
logarithmic mode, a confirmation message appears to prevent the lost of previous
interval values
If the user changes any distribution value, the interval distribution becomes the
custom mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The top N is generated according to a defined attribute of items. For instance, the top 1 of
alarms counts the highest number of items with the same value for this attribute.
Note: The values of the alarms in the Alarm Filters panel are case sensitive and must
be written exactly as they appear in NUART. For example, the Probable Cause for an
alarm in NUART is written as X721-performanceDegraded, then in View Template
Editor it must be written with the exact same characters in the Value field.
The graphics for the equipment view templates are 2D.
See also Display equipment view properties (p. 18-17).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives the description of visibility of the Availability Domain:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The figures below provide an example of the Properties window of an equipment view.
For more information about parameters, refer to Procedure 18-1.2: Create view
template (p. 18-23).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Display view properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1: View template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.1: Open view template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Depending on the type of view to create, perform one of the following options:
Create standard view (p. 18-26)
Create vector view (p. 18-28)
Create matrix view (p. 18-30)
Create equipment view (p. 18-32).
Result: The view is created accordingly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Result: The following confirmation popup window appears:
Are you sure you want to create view template <view_template_name> ?.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The view is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
1 Drag and drop as appropriate the following objects from the right frame in the Tabular
View:
Indicators
The indicators are filtered when creating a view template depending on their type:
For a standard view template, axis, vector and matrix indicators are not allowed
For a vector view template, only vector indicators are allowed
For a matrix view template, only matrix indicators are allowed.
Regardless of the type of view template, temporary indicators can only be added when
editing a view interactively.
Counters
Counters can only be added when editing a view interactively. They cannot be mixed
with any other type of object.
Design Parameters
Logical Parameters
Rules
Events
Free Fields
Synthetic Diagnosis.
Result: The availability domain is updated automatically depending on the
availability domain of the indicators, counters and parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Primary Graphic, in the Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects.
Select the appropriate graphic Type.
For the Min and Max Y-Axis, leave Computed, or type the required values.
The Primary Graphic is not mandatory. If used, the axis for this graph appears on the left
side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the tabular
view, without overlapping those in the secondary view, and all having the same units.
Parameters can only be added to the graphic depending on their type. Only number types
can be added. Parameters with multiple values cannot be added.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: When dropping a function in the Primary Graphic list, it is automatically
added in the Tabular View list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Secondary Graphic, Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects, other than
the ones used for Primary Graphic.
Select the appropriate graphic Type.
For the Min and Max Y-Axis, leave Computed, or type the required values.
The Secondary Graphic is not mandatory too. If used, the axis for this graph appears on
the right side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the
tabular view, without overlapping those in the primary view, and all having the same
units.
Parameters can only be added to the graphic depending on their type. Only number types
can be added. Parameters with multiple values cannot be added.
Result: When dropping a function in the Secondary Graphic list, it is automatically
added in the Tabular View list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Drag and drop in the Filtering Indicator for warning the indicator to be used for filtering
when executing this view in a warning report.
This is one of the indicators from the Tabular view indicators that has a threshold defined
( or icons associated).
Result: The indicator parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Drag and drop in the Sorting Indicator for warning the indicator to be used for sorting
when executing this view in a warning report.
This is one of the indicators from the Tabular view indicators.
Note: Filtering and Sorting Indicators for Warning Reports must be available on the
whole extended part of the view template availability domain, otherwise the view
template cannot be created and an error message appears.
Result: The indicator parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Choose from the Sorting Direction the sorting indicator for warning (ascending,
descending or Best / Worst order). This takes into account the gravity sense
(UpperIsFault).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The indicator parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the Parameter Attributes field, select the type of values to display for all the parameters
in the view template (tabular and graphical modes):
Display Choice
Choose the type of values for parameters to display for all the parameters in the view
template for tabular and graphical modes. These override the choices in the user
preferences. At least one type has to be chosen if parameters are included in the view.
The following values are available.
Value Description
Operational Displays operational values.
Planned Displays planned values.
Min Reference Displays minimum reference values.
Reference Displays reference values.
Reference values are available only for
operational objects and not for soft-deleted
objects.
Max Reference Displays maximum reference values.
Forecast Displays forecast values of the tuning
sessions that will be selected in the
Execution Context.
Historical Displays historical values.
Operator Reference Displays operator reference values.
Value Change
If the Value Change option is checked, the source and target options are not valid.
Source
This parameter is used as the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
Target
This parameter is used as the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
Result: The indicator parameters are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop as appropriate the following objects from the right frame in the Tabular
View:
Indicators
The indicators are filtered when creating a view template depending on their type:
For a standard view template, axis, vector and matrix indicators are not allowed
For a vector view template, only vector indicators are allowed
For a matrix view template, only matrix indicators are allowed.
Regardless of the type of view template, temporary indicators can only be added when
editing a view interactively.
Counters
Counters can only be added when editing a view interactively. They cannot be mixed
with any other type of object.
Design Parameters
Logical Parameters
Rules
Events
Free Fields
Synthetic Diagnosis.
Result: The availability domain is updated automatically depending on the
availability domain of the indicators, counters and parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Primary Graphic, in the Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects.
Select the appropriate graphic Type.
For the Min and Max Y-Axis, leave Computed, or type the required values.
The Primary Graphic is not mandatory. If used, the axis for this graph appears on the left
side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the tabular
view, without overlapping those in the secondary view, and all having the same units.
Parameters can only be added to the graphic depending on their type. Only number types
can be added. Parameters with multiple values cannot be added.
Result: When dropping a function in the Primary Graphic list, it is automatically
added in the Tabular View list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Secondary Graphic, Tabular View, drag and drop the required objects, other than
the ones used for Primary Graphic.
Select the appropriate graphic Type.
For the Min and Max Y-Axis, leave Computed, or type the required values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Secondary Graphic is not mandatory too. If used, the axis for this graph appears on
the right side. The indicators / parameters chosen for this view are a subset of those in the
tabular view, without overlapping those in the primary view, and all having the same
units.
Parameters can only be added to the graphic depending on their type. Only number types
can be added. Parameters with multiple values cannot be added.
Result: When dropping a function in the Secondary Graphic list, it is automatically
added in the Tabular View list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop in the Matrix Indicator the appropriate indicator. There is only one Matrix
indicator per view.
Result: This automatically adds its two axis indicators.
For the X and Y-Axis Indicators of the Matrix Indicator, set as appropriate the:
Axis Indicator - the axis indicator name as specified on the added matrix indicator
Legend - the legend for each of the axis indicators
Units - the units for each of the axis indicators
Reverse - True or False. If True, then Reverse the display of the Axis Indicator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Create equipment view
Note: The availability domain for an equipment view contains a set of object types
and a set of periodicities.
In Basic Unavailability case, the availability domain contains only one object type
and it is automatically updated depending on the selected basic unavailability type.
For W-CDMA technology, if you choose Total outage as the basic unavailability type,
only the object type that have Total outage kind of basic unavailability will be
selected in the availability domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 For the Equipment View Type, select the appropriate type of equipment view template
from the following values:
Alarm
Basic Unavailability
Log.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Time Range Type field, select the target time range type for Top N computation.
The possible values are:
Unavailability Relevant Hours,
Unavailability Non Relevant Hours
24 Hours.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Only the global Top N result for the considered period appears.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Type of Result field, select the type of information on which the Top N
computation is based.
The possible values are:
Number of Occurrences
Time.
The time is displayed in:
Graphical mode: in seconds
Tabular mode: in days / hours / minutes / seconds. The exact format is:
<nb of days>d <nb of hours>h <nb of minutes>m <nb of
seconds>s
For example: 3d 4h12m10s
If the computed time is less than one day, then the day part is not displayed and so
on.
For instance: time = 6.5 hours is displayed as 6h30m0s; time = 12 seconds is
displayed as 12s.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the appropriate Basic Unavailability Type from the available dropdown list.
For instance, for GSM standard, the list of possible values is GSM and GPRS, but this
must be generic at Analysis Desktop level.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select the appropriate Alarm Criterion from the available dropdown list.
Optionally, in the Alarm Filters panel, add the appropriate:
Attribute, by selecting it from the available dropdown list
Operator, by selecting it from the available dropdown list
Value
Define the value by:
Selecting it from the available dropdown list with possible values in the case of
Attribute (Event Type , Perceived Severity , Probable Cause and Specific
Problem)
Double clicking in the Value row and typing the required criterion value for the
selected alarm in the case of Attribute (Friendly Name).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select between:
All to get all available considered values (and not only the top N values)
Top N to get the top N values selection. This is the default value.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 If is the case, select the Top N Value representing the number of items to be displayed in
the Equipment view.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.2: Create view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you need only a tabular view, deselect it.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Select the Grouped by Dependency check box if you want that Basic Unavailability to
be grouped by Dependency for counting.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Select the Include Children check box, when equipment view type is Alarm or Log, if
you want to include children in the count / outage request.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-35
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.3: Create view template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the View Template Editor window, select the view to copy, then click on .
Result: The view is copied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The user can choose to either copy by duplicating only the view template (thus linking to
the existing view templates) or by also duplicating the related view templates.
Result: The new view template is created with a default name:
<oldname>_Copy_n, where n is an incremental number to define a unique name.
The View Template Properties window is filled with the existing values, except for
the name and owner.
Access rights are reset to the default values, but you can change them as required.
The user becomes the owner of the view template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-36 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.4: Edit view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To add new functions, drag them from the right frame in the Tabular View panel.
In the case of an initial 2D view with multiple dates and network objects, if adding new
functions, the view is interactively changed into 3D type.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To set existing object(s) in the graphical representation, select it (them) in the Tabular
View and drag and drop them to the Primary / Secondary Graphic panels.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To remove a view template or a comment zone, select it, right click and select Remove.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-37
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.4: Edit view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The view template or comment zone is removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-38 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.5: Delete view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-39
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.6: Export view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more view templates from the view template tree of the View Template
editor.
Result: The view template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the view(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is done successfully.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml report dictionary containing
only the selection. The file is exported in the location defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The exported file can be re-imported on another system at the same plug installation level
(same system dictionaries) using NPO Import/Export Management web pages. Refer to
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import reports dictionary using GUI
procedure.
If some of the exported view templates are referencing customer objects, like indicators,
rules or free fields, a warning dialog is displayed indicating that the exported view
templates may not be imported on another system if the embedded customer objects are
not also exported and imported on the other system before the import of these view
templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-40 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-1.6: Export view template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The warning dialog also lists all the concerned customer objects and a Propagate button
is available to allow propagating them into the corresponding functions trees. Then, from
the corresponding function tree, the user can open the corresponding editor (by a right
click) and export these customer functions.
Refer to:
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Export QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameter rules using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields using GUI
Note: When a multi selection is done in a function tree of the Analysis Desktop and
the corresponding editor is opened from that tree (by a right click), the complete
selection is propagated in the editor (not only the first object).
Only the first object of the selection remains detailed in the edition part of the editor
window (as when doing a multi-selection directly in the left tree of an object editor).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-41
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network elements and the counters / indicators / parameters / view templates,
then:
Drag and drop them in the Tabular / Graphical Viewer, OR
Select from the menu bar View -> Execute View..., OR
Press Ctrl+Q.
Note: The QoS Counters / Diagnosis cannot be mixed with any other type of objects
that can be put in a view template. Vector and Matrix View Templates cannot contain
anything else than Vector and Matrix Indicators.
Result: The values related to the dropped objects are displayed in the Tabular /
Graphical Viewer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The Execution Context window appears. Enter the appropriate information, as presented
in Execution context (p. 3-19).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-42 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The NPO checks if the start time provided is older than the oldest date stored
in the NPO. In this case, an error message appears.
This message indicates that a view at 1/2 hour periodicity cannot be executed before
the oldest start time allowed
This message is the same as for other periodicities.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-43
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To execute other tasks while the request for the current view is in progress, click on
Run in background from the Execute View in Progress window.
Result: The On-going tab is created in the View browser. This is an empty tab which
displays a moving bar showing the submitted request is in progress.
If the view execution will generate multiple executed views, an On-going tab is
created for each view.
When a result is received by the Analysis Desktop, the on-going icon is removed
and the progress bar is replaced by the view content.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To cancel the requested view, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
Result: The Cancel Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To schedule the view, refer to Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60).
Result: The view is scheduled.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-44 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-12 Multi-object comparison with indicators
Figure 18-14 Multi-object evolution with multiple network objects, one counter
and several dates
Figure 18-16 Indicator view, multiple network objects, one indicator, several dates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-45
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-17 Indicator view, one network object, multiple indicators, several
dates
Figure 18-18 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, one
date
Figure 18-19 Indicator view, multiple network objects, multiple indicators, several
dates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-46 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-22 Equipment view with Preferred Date Display Type=Visible and Among
Network Objects No with N=10 and Top N Item = Alarm-Specific
Problem
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-47
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-24 Multi-object evolution view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-48 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-26 Multiple network object, multiple indicators, several dates
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-49
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-28 Matrix view with static bound out-of range values
In the above figure min and max values in the Legend panel with black color font
indicate that the Bound Distribution type is Static in the executed view. The user can also
select individual colored cell that will be highlighted with invert color rectangle in the
colored cell and the value of the cell appears in the Last Selected Value.
Figure 18-29 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm
Perceived Severity, Among Network Objects=No)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-50 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The graphical view divides all the data by the smallest raw periodicity time (or the
smallest difference between starting RP times) so that the data can be equally compared.
The following example shows how to divide the data using raw periodicity:
Figure 18-30 Equipment view with visible dates example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm
Perceived Severity, Among Network Objects=No)
The following figure shows the data that is used to create the graphial mode. The values
are adjusted to the smallest raw periodicity.
For example, in the table above the smallest raw periodicity is 15 min. So the value 100
of Cell A for the first counter RTCH_request (GTCAHRQN) is divided such that its raw
periodicity is 15 min thus 100 / 4 = 25. Likewise, RTCH_request (GTCAHRQN) for Cell
B is divided by 2 to go from an raw periodicity of 30 min to an RP of 15 min.
Figure 18-31 Equipment view with Visible Dates Example (N=4, Top N Item=Alarm
Perceived Severity, Among Network Objects=No)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-51
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-2: Execute view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-32 Raw graphical display for one counter, multi-object evolution
Figure 18-33 Raw graphical display for multi-counter, one object evolution
The counters are displayed showing the same values and associated duration as in the
original data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-52 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3: Edit executed view interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 18-3.8: Zoom in / out / rectangular for graphical view (p. 18-68).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-53
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.1: Edit title
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-54 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.2: Add network objects / indicators /
counters / parameters / rules / events / free fields /
diagnoses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network objects / indicators / counters / parameters / rules / events / free fields /
diagnoses to add.
Result: The network elements are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add the selected network objects to the view browser using Ctrl and drag and drop
(depending on the user preferences).
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected items are added to the
executed view, or a new view is created. The same Execution context (p. 3-19) is
used for the new items.
If indicators / counters / parameters are added to a graphic view, they are added to the
primary or secondary one (and tabular) depending on their units. If their units are not
those in the graphics, they are just added to the tabular.
If a vector indicator is added to a vector view template, it is added as the last
indicator.
If a matrix indicator is added to a matrix view, the current matrix indicator is replaced
by the new one since there is only one matrix indicator per view. The corresponding X
and Y axis indicators are then updated based on the new matrix indicator.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-55
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.3: Remove network objects / indicators /
counters / parameters / rules / events / free fields /
diagnoses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select from the topology tree the network objects / indicators / counters / parameters /
rules / events / free fields / diagnoses to remove.
Result: The network elements are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl and drag and drop (depending on the user preferences).
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected items are removed from the
current view or in a new view. The same Execution context (p. 3-19) is used for the
remaining items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-56 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Roll Up Do
Standard mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope -> Roll Up,
OR
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Roll Up.
Advanced mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced
Roll Up, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Advanced Roll Up.
To Drill Down Do
Standard mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope -> Drill Down,
OR
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Drill Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-57
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Drill Down Do
Advanced mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced
Drill Down, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Advanced Drill Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-58 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-1 Parameters of the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window (continued)
The interval on the view changes according to the temporal availability. Depending on the
user preferences, the data is updated either in the executed view or in a new view.
Below day periodicities such as: 4Hr, 1/2Hr, 1/4Hr, RAW etc. are treated as Hourly. If the
user rolls up from one of these periodicities, it is the same as rolling up from Hour.
Drilling down from Day always goes to Hour, if it is available, and not to one of the other
day periodicities described below:
The default sequence of roll up is: 5 Minutes->Quarter Hour->Half
Hour->Hour->Two Hour->Three Hour->Four Hour->Six Hour->Eight
Hour->Day->Week->Month
The default sequence of drill down is: Month->Week->Day->Eight Hour->Six
Hour->Four Hour->Three Hour->Two Hour->Hour->Half Hour->Quarter Hour->5
Minutes.
Temporal Roll Up and Drill Down below Hour periodicity are also available for counters.
If any filter is active on the current view, the Roll Up or Drill Down is always performed
on the actual data (invisible data is also taken into account, filtering is ignored).
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-59
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cells are displayed on a Day basis and the current availability domain of the executed
view is as indicated in the following table.
If you Roll Up from Day, the new period will be Month and not Week, because Cells are
not available on Week but are on Month. You cannot Drill Down because Cells are not
available on Hour.
You can choose to Roll Up or Drill Down, in Standard mode, only some rows / columns.
Select the rows / columns and:
Right click and select Temporal Scope-> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Temporal Scope -> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
Click on the Roll Up icon or on Drill Down icon from the view tool bar.
If the columns / rows are sorted and are not in a contiguous order and then selected for
roll up / drill down, the start and end dates considered will be the oldest and newest
selected dates respectively.
Temporal Roll Up / Drill down by sub-selection is not possible in 3D views when the
dates are present in the top level header as it is not possible to select them.
Note: For Temporal Drill Down from daily value for stored / calculated temporal
aggregation indicator (e.g. BH, MAX, MIN, AVG), the NPO will display the value of
the telecom indicator at hourly level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-60 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Roll Up Do
Standard mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope -> Roll Up,
OR
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Spatial Scope ->
Roll Up.
Advanced mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced
Roll Up, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Spatial Scope ->
Advanced Roll Up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-61
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Drill Down Do
Standard mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, elect View -> Spatial Scope -> Drill Down,
OR
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Spatial Scope ->
Drill Down.
Advanced mode Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced
Drill Down, OR
Right click on the view title area and select Spatial Scope ->
Advanced Drill Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-62 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-2 Parameters of the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window (continued)
The network objects in the view change depending on the spatial availability.
The interval on the view changes depending on the spatial availability. The data is
updated either in the executed view or in a new view, according to the user preferences.
When rolling up or drilling down to a relation, the relations that have the current network
object as the source are used; i.e. if the current object is Cell1 and the user drills-down to
Adjacency, then all the Adjacencies that have Cell1 as the source are displayed in the
resulting view.
When triggering a Drill Down for a mono-object evolution or a mono-object distribution
view, then views are generated as when executing them.
If any filter is active on the current view, the Roll Up or Drill Down is always performed
on the actual data (invisible data is also taken into account, filtering is ignored).
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-63
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cells are displayed on a Week basis and the current availability domain of the executed
view is:
If you Roll up from Cell, the new network object will be Network and not RNC, because
there is no RNC on Week but Network is available on Week periodicity.
If you Drill down from Cell, the new network objects will be all the outgoing Adjacencies
for all the Cells because Adjacencies are available on Week periodicity.
You can choose to Roll Up or Drill Down, in Standard mode, only some rows / columns.
Select the rows / columns and:
Right click and select Spatial Scope-> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Spatial Scope -> Roll Up or Drill Down, OR
Click on the Roll Up icon or on Drill Down icon from the view tool bar.
Spatial Roll Up / Drill down by sub-selection is not possible in 3D views when the
network objects are present in the top level header as it is not possible to select them.
When triggering a Roll Up or Drill Down in the context of a Working Zone, the Roll Up
or Drill Down is achieved inside the associated Working Zone topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-64 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial - temporal drill down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Achieve a direct spatial - temporal drill From the tool bar, select the icon.
down on the selected cell
Achieve a direct spatial - temporal drill Right click on the cell and select Direct
down on the selected cell Spatial-Temporal Drill-Down.
The data is updated either in the executed view or in a new view, depending on the
user preferences.
If there is no available topological sub-level, then the direct drill down will not be
spatial, but only temporal.
If there is no available periodicity sub-level, then the direct drill down will not be
temporal, but only spatial.
If the selected cell is already at the lowest spatial and temporal level, the function is
not accessible and the direct spatial-temporal drill down cannot be performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-65
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.7: Cursor facilities in graphical view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Use the cursor facilities Perform one of the following options:
From the tool bar, select the cursor icon, OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Cursor Mode.
Display the values on the axis Move the cursor over the view area.
Change the mouse cursor A vertical bar is always shown in the graphical display. By
moving it, the mouse cursor changes. The values for the
cursor area are shown at the current cursor location, like
on a tool tip. These values are also displayed in the legend.
Show grid lines Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, then select
Display Grid Lines, and click again on , OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Cursor Mode
Choices -> Display Grid Lines.
Show the values at cursor Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, then select
Display Value at Cursor, and click again on , OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Cursor Mode
Choices -> Display Value at Cursor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-66 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.7: Cursor facilities in graphical view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows the cursor facilities in graphical view.
In the case of reports, the vertical bars on executed views are synchronized.
Synchronizing the vertical bars causes the views to scroll when necessary of the value
in one view is not visible in another view.
When using the cursor in graphical mode and then switching to tabular mode, the
corresponding row / column gets automatically selected and visible. The tabular view
is scrolled if necessary to display the selected column.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-67
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.8: Zoom in / out / rectangular for graphical
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Zoom in Perform one of the following:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Select View -> Zoom In (+) from the menu bar, OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the mouse wheel down.
This magnifies the view on the graph.
Zoom out Perform one of the following:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Select View -> Zoom Out (-) from the menu bar, OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the mouse wheel up.
This reduces the size of the graph in the view.
Zoom in rectangular mode Perform one of the following:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Select View -> Zoom Mode from the menu bar
This allows you to draw a rectangle on the displayed chart
in order to define the area on which the zoom is directly
achieved.
Reset to the original size Perform one of the following:
Right click in the view and select Reset Graphic, OR
Select View -> Reset Graphic from the menu bar.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-68 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.8: Zoom in / out / rectangular for graphical
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-69
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.9: Change scale format in graphical view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Choose a different display scale Perform one of the following options:
for the Y-Axis of the primary Right click in the view and select Scale -> Primary
graph
From the menu bar, select View -> Scale -> Primary
The following list appears, enabling to choose a different
display scale for the primary graph:
None
Hundreds
Thousands
Millions
Billions
Trillions.
Choose a different display scale Perform one of the following options:
for the Y-Axis of the secondary Right click in the view and select Scale -> Secondary
graph
From the menu bar, select View -> Scale -> Secondary
The following list appears, enabling to choose a different
display scale for the secondary graph:
None
Hundreds
Thousands
Millions
Billions
Trillions.
According to the chosen scale, the Y-Axis tick labels values are displayed respectively
literally ( None), divided by: 100 ( Hundreds), 1 000 ( Thousands), 1 000 000 (
Millions), 1 000 000 000 ( Billions) or 1 000 000 000 000 ( Trillions).
By default, the used scale is None.
This feature is also available for Vector Views and the executed views from a report.
In case of 3D Views, a selected scale applies to all the 2D graphs of the 3D View.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-70 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate / inverse axis of view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Rotate / inverse the axis of a view Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
Rotate / inverse the axis of a view Select View -> Inverse axis from the menu bar.
In a graphical view, the axis are inversed. In a Tabular view, the rows are inversed with
the columns.
This is applicable also to 3D Views.
For example, if the indicators are on the horizontal axis and the cells are on the vertical
axis, when the user chooses to inverse the axis, the indicators are displayed on the vertical
axis and the cells are displayed on the horizontal axis.
Once inversed, if the view is then updated (interactive modification or view update from
the executed view properties dialog) the axes are kept in the same inversed state.
Note: To export the graphical view after rotation, for the excel format the graphic is
not exported with the rotated axis. For the pdf and html format the export is done with
the rotated axis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-71
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.11: Propagate selection to network object /
function trees in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select as appropriate:
Propagate All
Propagate All Network Objects
Propagate All Functions
Propagation Selected Network Objects, for the tabular view only
Propagate Selected Functions, for the tabular view only.
Result: The Network Objects are propagated to the corresponding modes active
topology trees / classifications and to the active basket of MultiNET mode.
If a mode cannot accept some types of objects to be dropped on it, a warning appears
and the cursor is updated during the drag and drop operation, when the cursor is on
top of a node in the modes tree or is above a tab. The definition of the types of objects
that can be dropped to another mode is done in a metadata file (
MaatQueryMetadata.xml file).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-72 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Refresh the view manually Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
For Comparison views, having only Start Date / Time
entered in the execution context, the latest available data is
included in the From Date / Time field in order to
manually refresh the view.
For Evolution views, the From Date / Time field is
unchanged.
To start the automatic refresh of a Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-73
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Evolution views and reports, the From Date/Time field is unchanged, while the To
Date/Time field is updated using the same algorithm as the one used when you click on
Default Date in the Execution Context window. If the new To Date/Time value is on
the next day (i.e. midnight crossing while automatic refresh is active), then the Start
Date/Time field is also updated (increased by one day).
For instance, if current day is January, 13th and initial start/end dates were: 12/01:05h to
13/01:08h; the view / report will be updated every hour until start/end becomes 12/01:05h
to 13/01:23h. The next update will lead to 13/01:05h to 14/01:00h.
In case the updated Start date after midnight crossing, would be in the future, the hour
part is forced to 0h00.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-74 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4: Edit executed view using dialog box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-75
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.1: Open executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the menu tabs from the Executed View Properties window:
View Template Properties
You can Procedure 18-4.2: Edit view template properties (p. 18-77).
Execution Context
You can Procedure 18-4.3: Edit view execution context (p. 18-78). For more
information, refer to Execution context (p. 3-19).
Spatial Scope.
You can Procedure 18-4.4: Edit view spatial scope (p. 18-79).
Result: The menu tabs are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-76 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.2: Edit view template properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Executed View Properties window, select the View Template Properties tab
Result: The View Template Properties panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Action Button
Apply the changes made on the current view Update View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create View
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-77
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.3: Edit view execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Executed View Properties window, select the Execution Context tab.
Result: The Execution Context panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Action Button
Apply the changes made on the current view Update View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create View
Result: The tabular / graphical viewer displays the values with the new data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-78 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-4.4: Edit view spatial scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Executed View Properties window, select the Spatial Scope tab.
Result: The Spatial Scope panel appears, displaying the list of the included network
objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To:
Add network objects from the spatial scope, select them and drop them to the view
panel
Remove network objects from the spatial scope, right click on them and select Delete.
Result: The selected network objects are added / removed.
Note: The modification of the network objects affects the availability domain. If the
availability domain is empty, an error message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Action Button
Apply the changes made on the current view Update View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create View
Result: The tabular / graphical viewer displays the values with the new data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-79
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Use executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives a brief description of the executed view tool bar icons.
Icon Description
Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view
(p. 18-73).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-80 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Use executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Icon Description
Procedure 18-3.12: Refresh view
(p. 18-73)
The Automatic Refresh icon is
visible only when:
The periodicity is below a day
(5 min, 15min, 30min, 1H, 2H,
..., 8H)
The observation period
includes current day.
In all the other cases, this button is
invisible.
Change view display type
(p. 18-98).
Procedure 18-3.11: Propagate
selection to network object /
function trees in view (p. 18-72).
Procedure 18-7: Save executed
view as template (p. 18-101).
Procedure 18-8: Export executed
views (p. 18-103).
Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill
down spatially (p. 18-61).
Procedure 18-3.5: Roll up / drill
down spatially (p. 18-61).
Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill
down temporally (p. 18-57).
Procedure 18-3.4: Roll up / drill
down temporally (p. 18-57).
Show legend (p. 18-85).
Procedure 18-3.6: Direct spatial -
temporal drill down (p. 18-65).
Highlight in view (p. 18-83).
Procedure 18-3.10: Rotate /
inverse axis of view (p. 18-71).
Remove filter(s) (p. 18-91).
Filter Repeated Value(s) - Filter
not yet applied
Filter Repeated Value(s) - Filter
already applied
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-81
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Use executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Icon Description
Show Filter List - Filter not yet
applied
Show Filter List - Filter already
applied
Show Manage axis (p. 18-107).
Zooms in on the graphic of the
selected view.
Zooms out on the graphic of the
selected view.
Zoom mode.
View Options.
If the Executed View window is too small, up and down arrows are displayed to navigate
among the executed view related icons, as seen in the figure below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-82 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Highlight in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Highlight in view
Highlighting is applicable on all functions except for counters and events.
To trigger the highlighting:
Click on icon from the view tool bar, OR
Select an item in the executed view, right click and select Select -> No Threshold /
Correct / Minor / Major / Critical / Sampling, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Highlighting (On / Off).
The cell background of the QoS indicator values are colored according to the QoS
indicators thresholds, to show the most significant information.
The following table presents highlighting criteria and description.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-83
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Highlight in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 18-3 Example of Highlighting Colors (UpperIsFault = true for Indicators)
(continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-84 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Highlight in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You must take into account the following criteria for highlighting:
When Sampling is set and Upper_is_fault flag is set to FALSE for the sampling
indicator and the value of the sampling indicator is smaller than the sampling value
defined in the indicator, then values are displayed in gray if Reliability is not set or set
but not wrong.
If there is no value for the reliability indicator, or there is no reliability indicator, then
it is as if reliability was not chosen.
If any filter is active on the tabular view inducing invisible rows or columns, the
highlighting synthesis is computed only on visible values basis.
The Standard View optional rows and columns (Total, Weight, Order, Average) cannot
be highlighted.
The synthesis and operations on the synthesis can be performed on the rows, columns
or both.
If any filter is active on the tabular view including invisible rows or columns, the
highlighting synthesis is computed only on the visible values.
Show legend
To show the legend for a view:
Click on the icon from the view tool bar, OR
Right click in the view, then select Show Legend..., OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Legend....
The Legend window appears in a detailed or synthetic mode. This window is not modal
and opens only in one instance.
The following figure shows a detailed Legend window, displaying the list of colors and
their meanings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-85
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the detailed Legend window displayed above, you can switch to a synthetic Legend
window by pressing the Synthetic button. A smaller resized synthetic Legend window
appears, composed only of the Hide, Select and Color columns and the Detailed button,
by which you can switch back to the detailed Legend window.
The following figure shows a synthetic Legend window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-86 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
Hide Hide / unhide rows in the tabular view, based on the selected criteria.
There is one checkbox per highlight criteria / color. You can hide more
than one color type.
Select When Select is chosen, then those rows / columns with the synthesis color
in the header are selected in the tabular view.
There is a checkbox per highlight criteria / color. You can select more than
one color type.
Criteria Short description of the criteria for coloring the table cells.
Color Color (or font style) associated with the criteria of highlighting.
Value Change Select / deselect the Value Change option.
Source Choose the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
Target Choose the default comparison type for highlighting in the view.
Synthetic / Toggle between detailed and synthetic display modes.
Detailed When the Legend window is in detailed mode, all the parameters of the
widow are visible and the button text appears as Synthetic.
When the Legend window is in synthetic mode, the button text appears as
Detailed and the following parameters do not appear anymore:
The Criteria description
The Parameter Comparison configuration area
The Sampling and Reliability rows
The Events Legend, Close and Help buttons.
Events Legend For each event type appears the Event Symbol and the Event Description.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-87
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
Help Display the contextual help.
Close Close / hide the legend.
To set a color for the rows / columns in the view, select their header, then in the Legend
window, click on the Select button corresponding to the required color.
In the user preferences, the default value for Select is the column. Therefore, when
pressing Select in the Legend window, all the chosen columns (and only columns),
header included, are selected.
The selection from Legend changes automatically when you have items in the view
highlighted, and then you select the critical values. See the example in the following
snapshots:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-88 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 18-36 Highlighting changes when critical values are selected in legend
Sort
The sorting feature is implemented very similar to the sorting implemented in Windows
Explorer.
To change the sorting direction inside the executed view:
Double click on a row / column header.
The sorted row / column is indicated with:
An up arrow - when sorted in ascending order (Example: or
If you double click on another column, then that column is sorted in ascending order.
OR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-89
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Sort
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on the row / column header, then right click and select Sort -> Ascending /
Descending as appropriate, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Sort -> Row / Column -> Ascending / Descending
as appropriate.
If a row / column is no longer sorted, the arrow is removed.
Filter in view
The operator can choose what information to be or not to be displayed using filters.
Filtering impacts the tabular and graphical executed view.
Add filter (table)
Add a filter in the tabular view:
1. Select the row / column header, then:
Right click and select Custom Filter, OR
From the tool bar, select as appropriate View -> Filter -> Filter Row / Filter
Column.
The Custom AutoFilter window opens.
2. Set the appropriate filtering criteria.
Equals =
Does not equal !=
Is greater than >
Is greater than or equal to >=
Is less than <
Is less than or equal to <=
Begins with
Does not begin with
Ends with
Does not end with
Contains
Does not contain
The * wildcard character is supported.
Filtering can be done depending on:
Highlighting: based on the highlighted indicator values
Selected rows or columns: by filtering a date, a network object, or an analysis
function.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-90 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Filter in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The filter is applied only to unhidden rows / columns. A row that is hidden on or prior
to applying the filter criteria remains hidden when the filter is applied / removed.
The filtered row or column header is shown in italics.
When a filtering criteria is applied on a column and the operator tries to apply
filtering on another column then the intersection of filtered values are displayed.
3. Click on OK.
Remove filter(s)
Perform one of the following options.
To Remove Do
One filter Right click on the filtered column and select
Clear Filter.
All filters Perform one of the following options
Select Clear All Filters, OR
Click on the icon from the view tool
bar, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Clear
Filters.
Filter list
To show all the applied filters in the executed viewer, perform one of the following
options:
Right click in the executed view and select Filter List..., OR
Select View -> Filter List... from the tool bar, OR
Click as appropriate on or from the view tool bar.
The Filter List window appears, displaying the list of applied filters (different from
Repeated Values Filter) associated with the current tabular view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-91
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Filter in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Remove the selected applied filter(s) Remove
Remove all applied filter(s) Remove All
Activate / deactivate all applied filter(s). Deactivate All
2. Click on OK.
Filter on period
Note: Filtering on Periods can be applied only in the case of evolution views / reports
and on date columns only.
Filter (hide) periods:
1. In the executed view, select the items below:
One or several days of the week, and / or
One or several hours of the day, and / or
One or several date and time periods (depending on the periodicity), and / or
One or several particular dates and / or times (depending on the periodicity).
2. From the menu tool bar, select View -> Period Filter..., OR right click and select
Period Filter....
The Filtering on Period window appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-92 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Filter in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The conditions applied for filtering depend on the periodicity. The period granularity
can only be greater or equal to the current periodicity, as follows:
For Hourly periodicity, all options are available
For Daily periodicity, Hours of Day is disabled
For Weekly and Monthly periodicity, Hours of Day and Days of Week are
disabled.
3. Perform one of the following options.
To hide Do
A single date Check the Date radio button, then select the
appropriate start date and end date
Multiple dates Check the Date radio button, then specify
the required range of dates
A range of dates and times Check the Date and Time radio button, then
specify the required range of dates and times
One or more Days of Week Select the checkbox corresponding to Days
of Week, then select the appropriate days
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-93
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Filter in view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To hide Do
One or more hours of the day Select the checkbox corresponding to Hours
of Day, then select the appropriate hours.
The tabular column / row header is marked in italic when a Top N Filter is applied on it.
Note: When only string values are present, this feature is not accessible (greyed).
If there are multiple values satisfying the condition, then all of these values are
shown.
The Top N row / column filter is added in an append mode to the current view filter list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-94 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Hide a row Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Hide -> Hide
Row, OR
Select View -> Hide -> Hide Row.
Unhide all rows Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Unhide ->
Unhide all Rows, OR
Select View -> Unhide -> Unhide
All Rows.
To Do
Hide a row Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Hide -> Hide
Column, OR
Select View -> Hide -> Hide Row.
Unhide all rows Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Unhide ->
Unhide All Columns, OR
Select View -> Unhide -> Unhide
All Columns.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-95
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Hide the repeated values:
1. Select the date rows or columns for the repeated values displayed for a set of dates.
2. Perform one of the following options.
To Do
Hide repeated values Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Hide -> Hide
Column, OR
Select View -> Hide -> Hide Row.
Unhide repeated columns Perform one of the following options:
Right click and select Unhide ->
Unhide All Columns, OR
Select View -> Unhide -> Unhide
All Columns.
Click on the icon from the view tool bar.
In 3D Views, the repeated values filter is applied only if the dates are present in the second level
header, while the repeated values are filtered within a Top Level Header.
When this filter is being applied, the current view filter list state is checked. If the filter list is not
empty and is activated, then a warning message appears as shown in the following figure.
3. Click on OK.
When a Non Repeated values filter is being applied, no check is performed on the rest of the filter(s)
applied.
The following figure shows a 3D view with hidden repeated values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-96 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Hide / unhide rows / columns / repeated values
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-97
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Change view display type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resize
To resize a row / column, select the line separating the row / column, then drag and drop
the line to the appropriate size.
This only changes the selected row / column, and not all rows / columns.
Double clicking when in between the two columns resizes the left column based on the
size of the data included within the column. Double clicking when in between two rows
resizes the top row based on the size of the data included within the rows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-98 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-5: Copy to system clipboard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 An executed view must exist in the tabular / graphical viewer or in the report viewer.
Copy the required data from the table and / or graphical viewer. Selection of only several
rows and columns is possible.
Result: The data is copied into system clipboard in the following formats:
Unformatted text
html
Picture (Enhanced Metafile)
Internal view template format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-99
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-6: Rename executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-100 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-7: Save executed view as template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Close an executed view Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the view name tab, and select Close, OR
Right click on the view, and select Close, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-101
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Close executed view(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Close all executed views Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the view name tab, and select Close, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Close, OR
Click on the icon from the tool bar.
Only the completed executions are closed. The On-going tabs for
the executions which are in progress, remain open.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-102 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-8: Export executed views
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Export one view Perform one of the following options:
Select the view, then select View ->
Export -> Full... from the tool bar, OR
Select an element in the view, right click
and select Export -> Full....
The original full view is exported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-103
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-8: Export executed views
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Perform one of the following options:
Select the view, then select View ->
Export -> Display... from the tool bar ,
OR
Select an element in the view, right click
and select Export -> Display....
The currently displayed view (ie. with filter
applied on executed view) is exported.
If the view is already in the Executed View
browser, an alternative is to click on the
icon. This triggers an original full view export
(Full Export and not Export Display).
Export several views Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon, OR
From the tool bar, select View -> Export
All....
All views are exported and gathered in the
same zip file.
This triggers an original full view export (Full
Export and not Export Display).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-104 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-8: Export executed views
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Export View window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Browse for the location to save the view, give the appropriate File Name, and then select
the appropriate export format:
.xls
.csv
.xml
.html
.pdf
If Export all was selected in the previous step, the export format refers to the files
contained in the .zip file.
Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is Successful. Do you want to open the exported file?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-105
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-8: Export executed views
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
To open the exported file Yes
The file opens in a new window.
If you do not want to open the exported file No
Result: The view is exported to the selected format, keeping the same look as in the
tabular / graphical modes.
For the tabular mode, the rows and columns are in the same positions. Highlighting is
displayed and the same colors are used. The information about the spatial scope and
view template parameters is also displayed.
For the graphical mode, the X-axis and Y-axis have the same data. The same colors
are used. The legend is displayed. Information about the spatial scope and view
template parameters is also displayed.
You can use an Excel Template for the graphical mode. For more information, refer to
the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import Excel template using GUI.
The view tool bar is not included in the export.
When the executed view embeds indicator functions, the related basic indicator
formula is available for every displayed indicator through a Excel Comment triggered
on indicator label.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-106 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Procedure 18-9: Execute diagnosis in an executed view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create a diagnosis scenario with an indicator as trigger (double click on the indicator).
Refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide document.
Result: The diagnosis scenario is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manage axis
In 3D Views, this feature allows managing the three dimensions and choosing which
dimensions must be grouped and, for that group, which dimension is on top and which is
on the bottom.
Note: This feature is allowed only for Standard Views, not for Equipment Views,
Vector or Matrix Views. It is also not applicable to views displaying counters using
Raw Periodicity.
Axis Management allows managing the dimensions in the following two ways:
Choose between column grouping and row grouping
Choose the dimensions which are used as the top level headers, second level header
and the non-grouped header.
By default, Columns are grouped and the Time dimension is placed as the top level
column header, the functions at the lower column header level, and network objects as
rows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-107
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Manage axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can choose to change the default values in the 3D Views tab.
The Axis Management dialog can be accessed as follows:
From the tool bar of the executed view, by clicking on the icon, OR
In the executed view, right click and select Axis Management, OR
From the menu bar, select View -> Axis Management.
You can choose to change the placement of the dimensions after the execution of the view
/ report, as shown in the Axis Management window below.
The Axis Management of the views in a report is at the view level and the axes of each
3D view in a report can be managed independently of the other views.
You can select more than one Network Object, more than one Function and more than one
Date.
The result of the multiple selection is a three dimensions table that is displayed using
nested tables.
A nested table is a standard table that has two column (or row) headers instead of one.
For example, the first column header is for the dates and there are as many columns as
selected functions.
The double header is always used for columns and never for lines.
The following figures show the two types of nested tables.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-108 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Manage axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 18-109
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Views Manage axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
18-110 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
19 Reports
19
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to manage reports. It describes how to create, edit, display,
delete and execute reports.
Contents
Presentation 19-2
Procedure 19-1: Use report template editor 19-18
Procedure 19-2: Execute reports 19-30
Procedure 19-3: Edit executed report interactively 19-34
Procedure 19-4: Edit executed report using dialog box 19-54
Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports 19-60
Display pending and archived executed reports 19-66
Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor 19-70
Use executed report 19-80
Filter in report 19-82
Highlight in all report views 19-83
Display grid in all report views 19-83
Procedure 19-7: Edit view from executed report template 19-84
Duplicate executed report 19-84
Procedure 19-8: Rename executed report 19-85
Resize automatic views and legends in report 19-85
Synchronize axis management 19-86
Archive reports 19-86
Toggle display type (tabular / graphical) 19-87
Synchronize 3D view graphs 19-87
Synchronize legend resizing 19-88
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
Note: The MUSE_REPORT_TEMPLATE_CREATION_LICENSE must be installed for the
reports creation.
The MUSE_REPORT_LICENSE must be installed to execute reports.
A report template is composed of a set of view templates. A Report, which is composed of
Views, enables you to display results coming from Indicators / Parameters in View
Templates.
A Report enables you to display results coming from Indicators or Parameters in View
Templates in a tabular way or graphical way. A Report contains the network objects, view
templates and comment zones, and an Execution Context (period, interval, sampling,
interpolation, reliability options). As a report template is composed of view templates, a
report is composed of views. A report is also known as an Executed Report and is
displayed in the Report Viewer.
In a view of the report, it is possible to use three dimensions (a fixed point and two lists):
A list of objects
A list of dates
A list of items (data).
Depending on which dimension is fixed, reports are named differently (evolutions,
comparison, multi-object).
A report template is a formal description of a sequence of graphical representations of
QoS indicator or parameter values. A report template is then used to build from its
definition and for one or several objects (according to the type of report template) a report
that displays indicator or parameter values for the considered date(s). A report template is
mainly composed of one or more view templates and comment zones.
You may customize the report (e.g. define a title, view templates, specify the legend, etc.).
You can save the report as a report template so that the same template can be used to
display any other report generated dynamically from the output of analysis services.
The report template type is required during the creation of the report template and cannot
be changed afterwards. Depending on the type of the QoS report template, different
information is requested to define the report template.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: After one month, all the published views and reports are purged.
There are two types of reports.
Observation Reports
There are four types of observation report types:
Mono-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Evolution Report
Multi-Object Comparison Report
Mono-Object Distribution Report.
The following table presents the types of observation reports. Number of Objects refers to
the number of network objects used when creating the executed report. You can select a
maximum number of 250 objects.
The Covered Period refers to the date(s) entered in the Execution Context when creating
the executed report.
Warning Reports
For both observation and warning reports, you can select a maximum number of 250
objects.
To change the limit of 250 objects, you must modify the analysis.desktop.objects.re-
ports.limit parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/usm/config/ad_
param.cfg
To change the limit of 20 reports executed in the reports browser, you must modify the
following parameters:
analysis.desktop.views.inside.report.limit parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/usm/config/
ad_param.cfg
MAX_REPORTS_TAB parameter from the following file:
/alcatel/muse/MUSEADWEBSTART/webapps/AD/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/usm/config/
ad_param.cfg
MAX_EXECUTED_REPORTS parameter from the following file:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/reports/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/maat/reports/
ReportsResourceFile.cfg
In order for the updates to be taken into account in Analysis Desktop, you must close and
then re-open the Analysis Desktop.
Important! Changing these parameters is not under Alcatel-Lucent responsibility.
Putting higher values then the values tested in Alcatel-Lucent labs may cause higher
response time or even request that do not answer.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A trend periodicity evolution can be requested on this type of report.
A color and a pattern are automatically set to each network object of the whole report (the
color and pattern set of standard indicator or parameter is ignored since there is only one
standard indicator or parameter per view). All network objects are displayed in the same
order in all views.
Many network objects are selected, and an interval of time is specified. If only one
function in a given view, the result is as shown in the following table.
Figure 19-4 Example of multi-object evolution table made with an object list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-6 Example multi-object comparison table
Warning reports
A warning report is a specific report composed of many views in which each view is
filtered according to its filtering indicator and sorted according to its sorting indicator.
Therefore, the objects may be different from one view to another.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The filtering mode is defined at a report level: it is a property of the warning template
report. A warning report can contain only views with a filtering indicator.
You can set the warning parameters to filter the cells according to different criteria. The
criteria may be selected individually or combined:
Parameter Description
Best / Worst Best indicates the Good objects, and Worst indicates the Bad objects.
Best is greater if UpperIsFault = false on the filtering indicator.
Worst is greater if UpperIsFault = true on the filtering indicator.
Top N The selection is made by keeping the Top N Best or Top N Worst Values.
Top N Variation The selection is made by keeping the Top N Best or Top N Worst Values
Value of the Absolute or Relative Variation based on the Reference Period.
Filtering on Color The selection is made by comparing the values of the filtering indicator
Value with its associated thresholds, depending on the color choice.
The thresholds are those defined on the filtering indicator.
Filtering on The selection is made by comparing the computed variation to the chosen
Variation Value variation.
The computed variation is the difference between the value of the filtering
indicator's warning date and the value of the reference period for absolute
variation.
For relative variation the absolute variation is divided by the value on the
reference date.
When computing a QoS warning report, two fields Before and After are used to retrieve
the evolution of the filtering indicator for the returned objects around the report date.
Before and After are given in number of periods with respect to the periodicity chosen
when computing the report. This is extra information added to the tabular view and does
not affect the filtering of data chosen for the warning report or the graphical view.
In the tabular view of a warning report, the indicator used for sorting is marked with an
arrow in the table header, to know which indicator was used and in which direction the
sorting occurred. The network objects are sorted according to the sorting indicator as first
sorting criterion. Then the network object friendly name must be used as a second sorting
criterion in order that, if multiple objects have the same value for the sorting indicator,
they are anyway sorted according to their name
Examples
The following example presents the input for threshold and top combinations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following tables present the threshold output after applying the filtering criteria to the
example above.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-10 Warning reports: worst value filtering on color
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning table
The warning table comprises:
The left part, containing the values of standard indicators for the report date
The right part, containing the evolution of the filtering indicator for the period around
the report date, according to the number of periods before and after the report date
specified in the Execution Context.
The values of the filtering indicator in the left and right part are colored according to the
thresholds defined on the standard indicator. Note that for a Top N objects report, it is
possible that all values are black.
If variation is selected, the last column of the left part contains the variation value. The
column is named Relative Variation or Absolute Variation (depending on the report
template definition):
For a relative variation, the value is displayed in percentage and the unit is %
For an absolute variation, the unit of the filtering indicator is the unit of the variation
column.
If sampling checks are selected, only the left part is colored according to the rules defined
in Highlight in view (p. 18-83).
Legend in warning reports
For each of the warning view embedded in a warning report a legend information is
shown as a multi-line tooltip when the mouse is on top of the view title. This legend is a
short description of the report and view parameters.
The following legend for the four different types of Warning reports are available:
Top N Warning View legend: <Top Objects><Best / Worst><Filtering
indicator>
Examples: 5 Best Call_success_rate
Top N variation Warning View legend: <Top Objects><Best /
Worst><Filtering indicator><absolute / relative> variation
(compared to <Reference Period> periods ago)
Examples: 5 Worst Call_success relative variation (compared to 10 periods ago)
Color filtering Warning View legend: <Best / Worst><Filtering
indicator>(<Color filter>)
Examples: Worst Call_drop (Red, Orange)
Variation filtering Warning View legend: <Absolute / Relative><Filtering
indicator> variation <better / worst> than <Variation
value>[%] (compared to <Reference Period> periods ago)
Examples: Absolute Call_drop variation better than 10 (compared to 7 periods ago)
The following figure shows an example of an executed Top N Warning report with the
first view showing legend information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning graphic
Variation, Before, and After on the Reference Period are not displayed on the graphic
view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning for Area Threshold
The following formula must be verified to consider an object in warning:
I warningDate >= value
The following example presents a warning table for area threshold for selected objects
with a Call drop rate > 4% and where RTCH attempts > 1000.
The following example presents a warning table for area variation for selected objects
with relative variation of the Call drop rate > 4% between J and J-1 and where RTCH
attempts > 1000.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1: Use report template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.1: Open report template editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.2: Create report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.2: Create report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.2: Create report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When creating a Warning report, you must take into account the following parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.2: Create report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on .
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The report is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.3: Create report template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Report Template Editor window, select the report template to be copied, then click
on .
Result: A selection panel opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Choose either to copy by duplicating only the report template (thus linking to the existing
view templates) or to copy by also duplicating related view templates.
Result: The new report template is created with a default name: <oldname>_Copy_n,
where n is an incremental number to define a unique name.
The Report Template Properties window is filled with the existing values, except
for the name and owner.
Access rights are reset to the default values, but you can change them as required.
The user becomes the owner of the report template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Set existing object(s) in the graphical Select it (them) in the Tabular View and drag
representation and drop them to the Primary / Secondary
Graphic panels.
Edit a view in the comment zone Perform the following steps:
1. Right click on the view, and select Edit
View Template.
The View Template Editor window opens.
2. Click on .
3. Edit the appropriate fields, then click on
.
4. Click on OK at the confirmation window,
then click on Close to close the View
Template Editor window.
Add a comment Perform the following steps:
1. In the View Templates and Comment
Zones panel, right click and select Add
Comment Zone.
2. In the Add Comment Zone box, add your
comment, then click on OK.
Remove a view or a comment zone Select it / them, right click and select Remove.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.4: Edit report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Reorder the views or comment zones in the Perform one of the following options:
report Use the Up / Down arrows, OR
Right click and select as appropriate.
Select:
Move to first position
Move to last position
Move up
Move down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.5: Delete report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Click on
Only one report is selected to delete Yes
Multiple reports are selected to delete Yes to all
Result: The report / s is / are deleted from the operator function tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.6: Export report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more report templates from the report template tree of the Report Template
editor.
Result: The report template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the report(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is done successfully.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml report dictionary containing
only the selection. The file is exported in the location defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The exported file can be re-imported on another system at the same plug installation level
(same system dictionaries) using NPO Import/Export Management web pages. Refer to
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import reports dictionary using GUI
procedure.
If some of the exported report templates are referencing customer objects, like indicators,
rules or free fields, a warning dialog is displayed indicating that the exported report
templates may not be imported on another system if the embedded customer objects are
not also exported and imported on the other system before the import of these report
templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-1.6: Export report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The warning dialog also lists all the concerned customer objects and a Propagate button
is available to allow propagating them into the corresponding functions trees. Then, from
the corresponding function tree, the user can open the corresponding editor (by a right
click) and export these customer functions.
Refer to:
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Export QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameter rules using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import free fields using GUI
Note: When a multi selection is done in a function tree of the Analysis Desktop and
the corresponding editor is opened from that tree (by a right click), the complete
selection is propagated in the editor (not only the first object).
Only the first object of the selection remains detailed in the edition part of the editor
window (as when doing a multi-selection directly in the left tree of an object editor).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-2: Execute reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the network element(s) and report template(s) of the same type, then:
Drag and drop them in the report viewer, OR
Select Report -> Execute Report..., OR
Press Ctrl+Shift+R.
The same action applies for network element(s) and:
View templates from the Functions browser
Indicators from the Functions browser.
In this case, the result is a report with one view per indicator.
For example, if 10 cells and four indicators are selected and dropped in the executed
report, four views are created in the executed report.
Result: The Execution Context window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The report viewer displays the executed report to the operator, containing the
following:
The QoS Requirement used when executing the report
The Working Zone used to execute the report
The sub-title for mono-object evolution or mono-object distribution report: the
identifier of the selected object as displayed in tree gadget followed by the begin
date and the end date.
The sub-title for multi-objects comparison and warning report: the object type of
the requested objects followed by the requested date. If one trend is selected for
the report (only for object evolution report), the type of trend is displayed after the
period.
The format of the date depends on the selected period (taking into account user
preferences):
For 1/4 Hour period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY-HH:MM
For 1/2 Hour period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY-HH:MM
For hour period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY -HH
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-2: Execute reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Day period, the date is displayed as: DD / MM / YYYY
For Week period, the date is displayed as: YYYY-Week NN where NN is the
week number (01 to 53)
For Month period, the date is displayed as: NameOfTheMonth YYYYThe
time format using Week number and Month name is an option and can be
configured at server level ( MUSE_INSTALL file) to provide similar behavior
to complementary applications such as Web Client, Web Publishing.
To enlarge the executed report to window size, double click on its title tab, OR click
on the array from the splitter.
In case of a request which takes more time, the Execute Report in Progress window
appears before the executed report is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To execute other task while the request for the current report is in progress, click on
Run in background from the Execute Report in Progress window.
Result: The On-going tab is created in the Report browser. This is an empty tab which
displays a moving bar showing the submitted request is in progress.
If the report execution will generate multiple executed reports, an On-going tab is
created for each report.
When a result is received by the Analysis Desktop, the on-going icon is removed
and the progress bar is replaced by the report content.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To cancel the requested report, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
Result: The Cancel Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To schedule the report, refer to Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports (p. 19-60).
You can execute again a report template that was already executed.
Result: The report is scheduled.
Each time a report is scheduled, a job is created.
In order to manage jobs, there are operations which can be performed from the
Analysis Desktop, from the Administration menu, from both (see the following
table), or from SFTP. Refer also to Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor
(p. 19-70) and to the NPO Administration User Guide, to Manage Job Results.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-2: Execute reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The job results can be also downloaded through SFTP. All successful job results are
stored upon completion in the SFTP repository under the following directory:
{SFTP_HOME}/NPO_JOBS/<USER_ID>/<DATE>/<File Name>, located on the
same server as NPO.
Where:
{SFTP_HOME} is the home directory of the sftp server, retrieved from the
MUSE_INSTALL file at installation
<USER_ID> is the identifier of the NPO user that scheduled the job
<DATE> is the execution date of the job and
<File Name> is the filename of the job result.
Every day, all files older than 10 days (this is a configurable value retrieved from
MUSE_INSTALL file at installation) are removed from the SFTP repository.
If there is a file name conflict, for example, two or more jobs with the same file name
result, only the first executed file is saved. The format of the file stored in the SFTP
repository is the file format chosen during the scheduling operation.
Note: When stored in the SFTP repository, the files must not have names
containing the : character. This character must be substituted by the #
character.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3: Edit executed report interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 19-3.7: Remove functions from view embedded in report (p. 19-41)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Procedure 19-3.13: Propagate view selection to network object / function trees from
executed report (p. 19-53).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.1: Edit title
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the appropriate title of the executed report, then click on OK.
Result: The executed report title is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-35
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.2: Add network objects to report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add the selected network objects to the report viewer using Ctrl and drag and drop
(depending on the user preferences).
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected network objects are added to
the executed report, or a new report is created. The same Execution Context is used
for the new items. The new report is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-36 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.3: Add functions to view embedded in
report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the functions to add (for example counters, indicators, parameters, events, rules).
Result: The functions are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop them in the view from the report viewer using Ctrl and drag and drop
(depending on the user preferences).
Result: The selected functions are added to the same report, no matter what the user
preferences are. The same Execution Context is used for the new items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-37
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.4: Add views to report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate view template(s) from the View Template Tree.
Result: The view template is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl and drag and drop them into the executed report.
Result: Depending on the value set in the Drag & Drop modifier to add field from
Views / reports user preferences (p. 26-5), the key used for the adding procedure
may differ from Ctrl.
During this operation the cursor changes to if the view is compatible with the
executed report.
The selected objects are added to the executed report, or a new report is created if the
Open results in new report on editing field is checked in the Views / reports user
preferences (p. 26-5). The availability domain of the report is checked. The view
templates are executed and the resulting executing views are added to the end of the
report.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-38 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.5: Paste view into report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-39
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.6: Remove network objects from report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl-Shift and drag and drop (depending on the user preferences).
Result: Depending on the user preferences, the selected items are removed from the
current executed report or in a new report. The same Execution Context is used for the
remaining items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-40 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.7: Remove functions from view embedded
in report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the functions to remove (for example counters, indicators, parameters, events,
rules).
Result: The functions are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Ctrl - Shift and drag and drop (depending on the user preferences).
Result: The selected items are removed from the current view, without resulting a
new report, no matter what the user preferences are. The same Execution Context is
used for the remaining items.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-41
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.8: Remove views from report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-42 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Roll up Do
Standard Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope -> Roll Up, OR
report
Click on the icon from the report tool bar OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope -> Roll Up.
Advanced Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced Roll Up,
report OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Advanced Roll Up.
To Drill down Do
Standard mode, Perform one of the following options:
in the report From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope -> Drill Down, OR
Click on the icon from the report tool bar OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope -> Drill
Down.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-43
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Drill down Do
Advanced Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Temporal Scope ->Advanced Drill
report Down, OR
Right click on the report title area and select Temporal Scope ->
Advanced Drill Down.
Standard mode, Perform one of the following options:
in an embedded Click on the icon from the view tool bar OR
view
Right click on the view and select Temporal Scope -> Drill Down.
Advanced Right click on the view and select Temporal Scope -> Advanced Drill
mode, in an Down.
embedded view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-44 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 19-1 Parameters of the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window (continued)
If the user Rolls Up from Day, the new period will be Month and not Week, because
Cells are not available on Week but are on Month.
The user cannot Drill Down because Cells are not available on Hour.
The user can perform a Roll Up or a Drill Down either on the whole currently
displayed period scope (by default) or on the current selected periods scope (selected
rows or columns, if any). If disjoint time periods are selected, the Drill Down or Roll
Up will be performed between the first and the last date.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-45
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Roll up Do
Standard Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope -> Roll Up, OR
report
Click on the icon from the report tool bar OR
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Roll Up.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-46 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Roll up Do
Advanced Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced Roll Up,
report OR
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Advanced
Roll Up.
To Drill down Do
Standard Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope -> Drill Down, OR
report
Click on the icon from the report tool bar OR
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Drill
Down.
Advanced Perform one of the following options:
mode, in the From the tool bar, select Report -> Spatial Scope ->Advanced Drill
report Down, OR
Right click on the report title area and select Spatial Scope -> Advanced
Drill Down.
Standard Perform one of the following options:
mode, in an Click on the icon from the view tool bar OR
embedded
Right click on the view and select Spatial Scope -> Drill Down.
view
Advanced Right click on the view and select Spatial Scope -> Advanced Drill Down.
mode, in an
embedded
view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-47
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 19-2 Parameters of the Advanced Rollup/DrillDown window (continued)
The network objects in the report change depending on the spatial availability.
The interval on the report changes depending on the spatial availability.
For the report, the data is updated either in the same executed report or in a new
report, depending on the user preferences.
To trigger a Roll Up or Drill Down, the Analysis Desktop provides a list of possible
target object types (according to the context: up or down, availability domain etc.) for
selection through a popup menu. It is possible to skip the intermediate levels when
performing a spatial roll Up / drill down.
The user can perform a roll Up or a Drill Down either on the whole currently
displayed objects scope (by default) or on the current selected objects scope (selected
rows or columns, if any).
When rolling-up or drilling-down to a relation, the relations that have the current
network object as the source are used; i.e. if the current object is Cell1 and the user
drills-down to Adjacency, then all the Adjacencies have Cell1 as the source are
displayed in the resulting view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-48 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When triggering a Drill Down for a mono-object evolution or a mono-object
distribution report, then N reports are generated as when executing them.
In the case of a warning report with the Filtering Unavailable Objects option and
consistent criteria, the QoS Availability Indicator must be available in the target
availability domain when rolling-up or drilling-down.
Example:
Cells are displayed on a Week basis and the current availability domain of the
executed report is:
If the user Rolls-Up from Cell, the new network object will be Network and not RNC,
because there is no RNC on Week but Network is available on Week periodicity.
If the user Drills-Down from Cell, the new network objects will be all the outgoing
Adjacencies for all the Cells because Adjacencies are available on Week periodicity.
When triggering a Roll Up or Drill Down in the context of a Working Zone, the Roll
Up or Drill Down is achieved inside the associated Working Zone topology.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-49
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
To refresh Click on the icon from the report tool bar.
the report The latest available data is included:
manually
The To Date / Time field is retrieved from the execution context used when
executing the report
The To Date / Time field is updated to include the latest available data.
The icon is enabled when:
The periodicity is below a day (5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1H, 2H.
..., 8H)
The observation period includes current day.
In all other cases (Day / Week / Month / BH / Trend periodicities, no current
day), this button is disabled.
To start the Click on the icon from the report tool bar.
automatic The latest available data is included:
refresh of a
The To Date / Time field is retrieved from the execution context used when
report
executing the report
The From Date / Time and To Date / Time fields are updated to include the
latest available data.
The icon is visible only when:
The periodicity is below a day (5 min, 15min, 30min, 1H, 2H, ..., 8H)
The observation period includes current day.
Both, manual and automatic refresh, are available only at report tool bar level and not
in the embedded views associated tool bars.
The report is executed with the new dates / times and the new resulting executed
report replaces the previous one.
A manual refresh can be achieved between two automatic refresh requests, as long as
the previous refresh is ended.
Note: For Comparison reports, having only Start Date / Time entered in the execution
context, the latest available data is included in the From Date / Time field in order
to manually refresh the view.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-50 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Evolution views and reports, the From Date/Time field is unchanged, while the To
Date/Time field is updated using the same algorithm as the one used when you click on
Default Date in the Execution Context window. If the new To Date/Time value is on
the next day (i.e. midnight crossing while automatic refresh is active), then the Start
Date/Time field is also updated (increased by one day).
For instance, if current day is January, 13th and initial start/end dates were: 12/01:05h to
13/01:08h; the view / report will be updated every hour until start/end becomes 12/01:05h
to 13/01:23h. The next update will lead to 13/01:05h to 14/01:00h.
In case the updated Start date after midnight crossing, would be in the future, the hour
part is forced to 0h00.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-51
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.12: Propagate report contents to network
object / function trees
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Select
Click on the icon from the report tool bar Select as appropriate:
Propagate All
Propagate All Network Objects
Propagate All View Templates.
Select Report -> Propagate Selection from Select as appropriate:
the tool bar All
All Network Objects
All View Templates
The network objects / view templates are selected in their respective trees depending
on the options.
The Network Objects are propagated to the corresponding modes active topology
trees / classifications and to the active basket of MultiNET mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-52 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-3.13: Propagate view selection to network
object / function trees from executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select as appropriate:
Propagate All
Propagate All Network Objects
Propagate All Functions.
Propagate Selected Network Objects, for tabular view only
Propagate Selected Functions, for tabular view only.
Result: The Network Objects are propagated to the corresponding modes active
topology trees / classifications and to the active basket of MultiNET mode.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-53
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4: Edit executed report using dialog box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-54 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.1: Open executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-55
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.1: Open executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-56 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.2: Edit report template properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current report Update report
Create a new report with the performed Create report
changes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-57
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.3: Edit report execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current report Update report
Create a new report with the performed Create report
changes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-58 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-4.4: Edit report spatial scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Add network objects from the spatial scope Select them and drop them to the report panel.
Remove network objects from the spatial Right click on them and select Delete.
scope
Result: The modification of the network objects affects the availability domain. If the
availability domain is empty, an error message is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current report Update report
Create a new report with the performed Create report
changes
Result: The report viewer displays the values with the new data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-59
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Date tab, fill in the appropriate fields as presented in the table below.
Parameter Description
Name
Execution Date The date at which the scheduled report is executed, i.e. the report result
becomes available at the morning of this date.
The default date is the next day from the current date.
If the report repeats, then this is the first schedule date.
The date can be selected either by using the select bar, or by clicking on
and choosing it from the displayed calendar.
The date format can be configured in the user preference.
From Start date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
Execution Date in a number of days / weeks / months (according to the
selected periodicity).
Date from which the scheduled execution starts.
The default value is 1 day / week / month before the Execution Date.
At Start time of the observation period for execution.
To End date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
Execution Date in a number of days / weeks / months (according to the
selected periodicity).
The default value is 1 day / week / month before the Execution Date.
At End time of the observation period for execution.
The supported time format is hh (00 to 23) mm (00 to 59).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-60 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Data tab parameters are defined.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-61
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
Name
Job Title Defines the name of the job. This can be different from the report name.
Default values:
<Report short name>, if one report is selected
MultipleReport, if there are several reports selected
<Report short name>_Repeat or MultipleReport_Repeat, if
one or several report(s) is / are selected and repeat option other than
None is selected.
Owner Defines the owner of the job.
This parameter is read-only.
Working Zone Defines the current Working Zone being used by the current user.
This parameter is read-only.
Output Format Defines the output format for the scheduled report.
Possible values:
Analysis Desktop (displayed in Report Viewer), not available in SFTP
location
.xml
.xls
.csv
.html
.pdf
Archive, not available in SFTP location.
For Detailed Diagnosis execution, only the html format is available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-62 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The general parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To schedule the report on an entire working zone, select Entire Working Zone.
This may be particularly useful when executing a warning report.
Result: If the report is executed on the entire working zone, then the spatial scope
contains all the network objects in the working zone of the same type as the executed
report.
For example, if the report was executed on Cell 3G's in Working Zone A, then the
spatial scope of the executed report are all the Cell 3G's that were in Working Zone A
at the time when the report was executed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Repeat tab, set the appropriate frequency for the scheduled report repetition.
By default, the repeat option is None, so the report is only scheduled once.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-63
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-64 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-5: Schedule reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Repeat parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Execute.
Result: The scheduled reports are executed during the night, after the loading of
consolidation.
A report which is Scheduled and Archived is displayed in the Archived reports list;
refer to Display pending and archived executed reports (p. 19-66).
To view or delete scheduled reports, refer to Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler
editor (p. 19-70).
The scheduled reports purge computes the overall reports size. If this size is greater
than a configurable threshold, then it will drop oldest reports until the size goes below
the threshold.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-65
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display pending and archived executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view one or several pending executed reports, select them by checking the
checkbox, then click on Open / Mark as Viewed.
If the scheduled report encounters an error condition during the execution of the
report, this failed job is also listed in the pending executed reports list. A dedicated
column displays the Failure Reason. When you select such a report to view, it is
marked as viewed and it is not displayed anymore next time the dialog box is opened.
All the reports are opened one by one in a sequential order. If the report output is not
Analysis Desktop, then you are first prompted to save the report and then to open it to
view it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-66 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display pending and archived executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once a report is saved or viewed in the Analysis Desktop, then it is marked as viewed
and it no longer appears in the list of pending executed reports. If the current Working
Zone is not the Working Zone in which the report was scheduled, then when
displaying the executed report, any objects not belonging to the current Working Zone
are shown as 'unknown'.
Select the Archived tab in order to view the list of archived reports.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-67
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display pending and archived executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Delete an archive Delete
Open an archive Open
Close the Pending and Archived Executed Close
Reports window
Open the corresponding Online Help page Help
To see and display the Archived reports you must have the MUSE_NPO_REPOR-
T_ARCHIVING FAD.
As the Archived reports are associated with the Working Zone in which they were
executed, they may display only Unknown objects if opened by a user in a completely
different Working Zone.
Each Column of the Archived Reports can be sorted Ascending or Descending.
Only the report owner (archiver) and the administrator can delete an archived report.
The MUSE_NPO_ADMINISTRATE_ARCHIVED_REPORTS FAD allows a
user, having this FAD, to delete any Archived reports. Otherwise, the user can delete
only its own archives.
If the list of archived reports cannot be fetched from the server then error message
appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-68 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display pending and archived executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information regarding archived reports, refer to Archive reports (p. 19-86).
From the NPO, as described in the NPO Administration User Guide, in Download job results.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-69
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-70 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.1: Open job scheduler editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-71
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.2: Create job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-72 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.2: Create job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Date tab, select the date for which the job must be scheduled.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Repeat tab, set the appropriate frequency for the scheduled job repetition.
By default, the repeat option is None, so the job is only scheduled once.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Go To
QoS Requirement Procedure 3-5: Set QoS requirement
(p. 3-33)
Sampling Sampling (p. 3-28)
Reliability Reliability (p. 3-28)
Tuning Sessions Select forecast values in tuning sessions
(p. 3-28)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-73
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.2: Create job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For Go To
Filter for Warning Reports Filter unavailable objects (p. 3-28)
Event Synthesis Event synthesis (p. 3-30)
7 Drag the appropriate network objects from the topology tab tree (in the right frame) and
drop them in the Network Objects panel.
Result: The network objects are in the Network Objects panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Drag the appropriate reports or diagnoses from the selection tab tree (in the right frame)
and drop them in the Functions panel.
Result: The reports or diagnoses are in the Functions panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 For the job to be evaluated for the whole Working Zone, check Entire Working Zone:
Global.
Result: When this is selected, the Topology tab from the right frame is disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click on .
Result: A confirmation message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on Yes.
Result: The job is created and is added in the Job Scheduler Tree (in the left frame).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-74 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.3: Create a scheduled job by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Job Scheduler Editor, select the job to copy from the left frame, then click on
.
Result: The Job Scheduler Properties panel appears with the default name and
properties of the selected job.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Define a name for the copied job, using the following format:
<oldname_Copy_n>, where n is an incremental unique number.
Result: The name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Apply.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The scheduled job is created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-75
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.4: Edit scheduled job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Job Scheduler Editor, select the job to edit from the left frame, then click on
.
Result: The Job Scheduler Properties panel appears with the default name and
properties of the selected job.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The scheduled job is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-76 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.5: Delete scheduled job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The scheduled job is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-77
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.6: Display job list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column Description
Name
Job Name Name of the job.
Owner Owner of the job.
Job Type Type of the job.
The possible types are: Reports, Diagnosis.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-78 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-6.6: Display job list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Column Description
Name
Object Type Type of target object
Object Nb Object number or name of the job, taken from the working zone.
State Current state of the job.
The possible states of the job are: Active, Ended.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the required job and then select one of the following options.
To Do
Update the job list Click on Update.
Edit the current selected job Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the required job(s), then
select Edit from the popup menu, OR
Click on Edit.
The Job Scheduler Editor window opens.
Perform the actions described in
Procedure 19-6.4: Edit scheduled job
(p. 19-76).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-79
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following table gives a brief description of the executed report tool bar icons.
Icon Description
Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report (p. 19-50)
Procedure 19-3.11: Refresh report (p. 19-50)
The Automatic Refresh icon is visible only when:
The periodicity is below a day (5 min, 15min, 30min, 1H, 2H, ...,
8H)
The observation period includes current day.
In all the other cases, this button is invisible.
Procedure 19-9: Save executed report as template (p. 19-89)
Synchronize zooming in report (p. 19-82)
Synchronize cursor / scrolling in report (p. 19-81)
Synchronize axis management (p. 19-86)
Highlight in all report views (p. 19-83)
Display grid in all report views (p. 19-83)
Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports (p. 19-90)
Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially (p. 19-46)
Procedure 19-3.10: Roll up / drill down spatially (p. 19-46)
Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally (p. 19-43)
Procedure 19-3.9: Roll up / drill down temporally (p. 19-43)
Resize automatic views and legends in report (p. 19-85)
Archive reports (p. 19-86)
Toggle display type (tabular / graphical) (p. 19-87)
Synchronize 3D view graphs (p. 19-87)
Synchronize legend resizing (p. 19-88)
Procedure 19-3.12: Propagate report contents to network object /
function trees (p. 19-52)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-80 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the Executed Report window is too small, left and right arrows are displayed to
navigate among the executed report related icons.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If all filters associated to an embedded view are deactivated, the synchronize scrolling can
be applied to this view.
Filter in report
This feature allows the operator to choose what to be displayed and what not to be
displayed through filters.
Filtering allows showing / hiding of:
Network Objects for a Multi-Object report
Functions, for example hide one indicator
Periods, for example filter Mondays data between 10 / 10 / 2006 to 11 / 10 / 2006,
Filter 00h. This is available only on Mono / Multi Object Evolution reports.
This filtering applies to all the views in the report.
All types of filters which can be applied to views in the Viewer browser can be applied to
views inside a report.
The filtering can be toggled on and off.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-82 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Highlight in all report views
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-83
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-7: Edit view from executed report template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the report template that contains one or several views to update.
Result: The report template is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-84 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-8: Rename executed report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Archive reports
You can choose to save an executed report as an archive that can be reopened later.
Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon from the report tool bar, OR
Select Report -> Archive Report , OR
Right click on the report name tab, and select Archive Report.
The Report Description window opens.
In this window you can fill a free text describing the report to be archived and to confirm
the operation.
The maximum number of Archived Reports can be configured in the design phase.
When archiving a new report, if the maximum number of Archived Reports allowed is
reached, the archive operation is rejected and an error message is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-86 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Archive reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-87
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Synchronize legend resizing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-88 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-9: Save executed report as template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Close one executed report Perform one of the following options
Right click on the report name tab, and
select Close, OR
Select Report -> Close.
Close all executed reports Perform one of the following options
Right click on a report name tab, and
select Close All, OR
Select Report -> Close All, OR
Click on the icon from the tool bar.
Only the completed executions are closed. The
On-going tabs for the executions which are in
progress, remain open.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-89
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-90 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Export one report Perform one of the following options:
Select the report, then select Report ->
Export -> Full... from the tool bar, OR
select an element in the report, right click
and select Export -> Full...
The original full report is exported.
Select the report, then select Report ->
Export -> Display... from the tool bar, OR
select an element in the report, right click
and select Export -> Display...
The currently displayed report (ie. with
filter applied on executed report) is
exported.
If the report is already in the Executed Report
browser, an alternative is to click on the
icon from the Executed Report browser. This
triggers an original full report export (Full
Export and not Export Display).
Export several reports Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon, OR
From the tool bar, select Report -> Export
All...
All reports are exported and gathered in the
same zip file.
This triggers an original full view export (Full
Export and not Export Display).
2 Browse for the location to save the report, give the appropriate File name, then select the
appropriate export format:
.xls
.xml
.csv
.html
.pdf
If Export all was selected in the previous step, the export format refers to the files
contained in the .zip file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-91
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Procedure 19-10: Export executed reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is Successfull. Do you want to open the exported file?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Open the exported file Click on Yes.
The file opens in a new window.
Do not open the exported file Click on No.
Result: The report is exported to selected format, keeping the same look as in the
executed report. The information about the spatial scope, , and report template
parameters is also displayed.
You can use an Excel Template for the graphical mode. For more information, refer to
the NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import Excel template using GUI.
The comment zones are exported as displayed. The reports and comment zones are
exported in the same order as displayed in the executed report.
The report tool bar is not exported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-92 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display spatial aggregation in views / reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-93
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Display spatial aggregation in views / reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 19-18 Multi-object comparison view with spatial aggregation option
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-94 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Linear Regression trend type is selected, the Predicted Period can take a value
between 0 and half the number of samples available in the observation interval.
In this case, the NPO performs the following operations:
1. Compute all indicators according to the execution context from the starttime to
endtime+P. For standard indicators NPO should not return data in the future. The
normalization function should not return data for the future
2. Create pseudo-indicators (Trend indicator, only on context of the view execution)
for each indicator having the flag Trend Supported set to true
3. For each Trend Indicator computes the trend from:
Starttime and endtime+P of the execution context. Only the trend indicators have
data in the future
The result of the computed value on step 1
Using the trend type defined in the execution context. Only one type moving
average or linear regression of trend could be defined for a given view.
4. Return to the client executed view that contains:
All indicators with their values from starttime to the current time with data from
current Time to endtime+P set to null and their associated highlighting
Trend indicators from the starttime to the endtime+P of the execution view context
and their associated highlighting.
For example: current time is 13 December 2010 10:00
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-95
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use static trend prediction in evolution views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Execute View definition:
1 indicator: GHOOTCGN
Indicator GHOOTCGN has the option TREND.
Execution Context:
Periodicity: Hourly
Starttime from 09th December 2010 00:00 to 13th December 2010 00:00
Predicted period = can be between 0 to 120 (endtime starttime in hour). In the
example the Predicted period is set to 48. it means the endtime become 15th
December 2010 (13th December 2010 00:00 + 48 hour).
The following figure shows an executed report on Trends Prediction in tabular mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-96 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 19-97
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Reports Use dynamic trend prediction in executed views and reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When a view is executed with Trends Prediction, the executed view is modified as
follows:
The tabular views contains additional rows for each of the indicators for which
dynamic trend is requested. The row name becomes: <indicator_name><Trend>
The graphical views contains a new entry in the Legends panel for each of the
indicators for which dynamic trend is executed. Legend name in the graphs is same as
that in tabular mode.
The following figure shows an executed view on Dynamic Trends Prediction in graphical
mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
19-98 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
20 MultiNET Mode
20
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the MultiNET mode.
Contents
Presentation 20-1
Use MultiNET mode 20-2
Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode 20-4
Apply filters in MultiNET mode 20-5
Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode 20-7
Presentation
The MultiNET mode is a pseudo mode which enables the execution of views, indicators
and reports on a selection composed of objects of various network element types and
object zones.
In MultiNET mode, on the top of the tree area are Basket tabs.
At the beginning of an Analysis Desktop session these tabs show the topology nodes
shown in the previous session. The Topology tree objects which are not available, because
of being deleted or change of working zone after User Preferences were saved in the last
session, are not displayed. The visibility of the soft-deleted objects is based on the user
preference.
There are five Basket tabs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 20-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Use MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can reorder the Basket tabs. Right click on a Basket tab and select Organize Trees.
The following window appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Use MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Organize baskets window is structured in the same way as in Procedure 2-4.10:
Organize function trees (p. 2-29).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 20-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop the objects taken from the other modes or basket tabs in the
tab from the Mode Tabs browser.
Result: While dragging and dropping the network objects or object zones, the mouse
pointer changes to .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop it to the cell modes to obtain the cells of the required object zone.
Result: The cells of the required object zone are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Drag and drop these selected cells (in the cell mode) to the MultiNET tab.
Result: The objects are added to the basket tab tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-1: Populate MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Remove objects
Perform one of the following options if required.
It is not possible to edit or remove a basket tab from the MultiNET.
To Do
Remove the selection from the current basket Right click on a basket and select Remove
From Basket.
Empty the corresponding basket, after a Right click on a basket and select Clear
confirmation from the user Basket.
Remove the deleted object zone (this is not Select Refresh in the basket tab.
done automatically) from the basket tab of the
MultiNET (if this deleted object zone was
present in a basket tab).
Go back to the first level nodes visible and Select Collapse all.
close everything.
The following figure shows the menu for the topology tree of MultiNET mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 20-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Apply filters in MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
New information appears in the function tab tree footer to inform the user about which
type of filtering is currently applied on the function tree and the Basket tab name from
which the filter is triggered for example: [Filter: AND / Basket 1], [Filter: OR / Basket 2]
or [Filter: No Filter].
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 20-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
MultiNET Mode Procedure 20-2: Execute view / report in MultiNET mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
20-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
21 POD mode
21
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the POD (Populated On-Demand) mode.
Contents
Presentation 21-1
Procedure 21-1: Populate POD mode 21-2
Procedure 21-2: Remove Object(s) from POD mode 21-3
Procedure 21-3: Clear a POD mode 21-4
Presentation
The POD mode is a pseudo mode that is available only for Large Working Zones.
This feature provides access to some modes when the number of objects in a working
zone is bigger than a pre-defined threshold (2000 cells).
At the beginning of an Analysis Desktop session the POD mode is empty. You have to
manually request the objects to check using drag and drop (including automatic
propagation).
The content of the topology classification of the POD mode is not persistent from an AD
session to the next AD session.
The topology objects of a POD mode are displayed in a tree.
Only one topology classification is available in a POD mode. This topology classification
is the first one defined in the metadata. It is not possible to create new topology
classifications for a POD mode.
The POD mode can be hidden / unhidden / reordered.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 21-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
POD mode Procedure 21-1: Populate POD mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop the objects taken from the other modes in the POD tab from the Mode Tabs
browser.
Result: While dragging and dropping the network objects or object zones, the mouse
pointer changes to .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples
Examples Description
Example 1 Drag and drop one or several BSC(s) into Adjacency (POD) mode will
retrieve all the related adjacencies from the BSC and add them into the
Adjacency POD mode.
Example 2 Drag and drop one or several BSC(s) into AIC (POD) mode will
retrieve all the AIC of the selected BSCs and add them into the AIC
POD mode.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
POD mode Procedure 21-2: Remove Object(s) from POD mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on YES.
Result: The selected objects are removed from the POD mode tree.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 21-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
POD mode Procedure 21-3: Clear a POD mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on YES.
Result: All the objects of the POD topology classification tree are removed from the
POD mode tree. The POD mode is empty.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
21-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
22 Diagnosis
22
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to perform diagnosis of QoS problems.
Contents
Presentation 22-2
Display diagnosis scenario properties 22-3
Procedure 22-1: Propagate diagnosis scenario 22-7
Propagate selection between synthetic and detailed report and topology 22-7
classifications
Procedure 22-2: Open diagnosis editor 22-8
Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode 22-9
Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode 22-11
Display execution logs 22-14
Procedure 22-5: Edit detailed diagnosis 22-15
Copy diagnosis view to system clipboard 22-19
Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports 22-20
Display pending executed diagnosis 22-23
Close executed detailed diagnosis 22-24
Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis 22-25
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
The operator can trigger diagnosis reports in the following situations:
A QoS indicator crossed a threshold
A QoS indicator is suspected to be faulty, even if no threshold was crossed (it is even
possible that no threshold is associated with the indicator)
An alarm is received.
The operator then executes diagnosis reports to retrieve the cause for an identified QoS
problem, or to check the logical configuration of any topology objects, particularly cells
and adjacencies.
The diagnosis execution results can be viewed as:
A synthetic summary, provided in the Views browser
The synthetic report of the standard diagnosis appears in icon format ( , , OR
).
A node per node detailed report, displayed on demand in the Reports browser.
Detailed diagnosis reports consist of test nodes grouped in a tree, based on causality links.
A detailed diagnosis tree is not limited in size.
The trees start with an observed QoS problem, an alarm or nothing is specified, and go
from node to node to the possible reasons until a root problem cause is found.
See also Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode (p. 22-11).
There are system available diagnosis scenarios, but the user can also create their own.
This is done through the Diagnosis Editor, which is based on the Eclipse platform
concepts.
The Eclipse framework is structured around the concept of plugins, and uses PyDev Node
Code Editor.
Diagnosis scenarios consist of test nodes grouped in a tree based on causality links. A link
is oriented from a consequence node to a causal node. A consequence node can have
several causal nodes. The execution of a diagnosis scenario is the process of executing its
causal nodes applied on an execution context.
Refer to the NPO Diagnosis Development User Guide document for more information
about the:
Diagnosis Editor
Scenario Creation
Node Code Update
Introduction in Python.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display diagnosis scenario properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display diagnosis scenario properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display diagnosis scenario properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display diagnosis scenario properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-1: Propagate diagnosis scenario
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag the selected diagnosis scenario and drop it to an indicator function tab.
Result: The mouse pointer changes to .
If you drag it to an incompatible function tab, the mouse pointer changes to .
Depending on how the Display time before a tab is raised and made active
parameter is set as a user preference, the target counter tree:
Is automatically displayed, or
You have to switch to the target counter tree to view it.
The view is auto-scrolled until the first selected object is visible.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-2: Open diagnosis editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate topology objects and diagnosis scenario(s), then drag and drop
them into the Executed View browser.
Result: The Execution Context window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Icon Description
Correct indicator value, no problem found.
Unknown.
Incorrect indicator value, problem found.
Diagnosis must be triggered.
In case of a request which takes more time, the Execute Diagnosis in Progress
window appears before the executed diagnosis is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-3: Execute diagnosis in synthetic mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To cancel the requested diagnosis, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
Result: The Cancel Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate topology objects and diagnosis scenario(s), then drag and drop the
objects into the Report browser.
Result: The Execution Context window appears. Enter the appropriate information,
as presented in Execution context (p. 3-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To cancel the requested diagnosis, right - click on the On-going tab and click on Close.
Result: The Cancel Confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
From executed synthetic diagnosis view with standard indicator with red cell value
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The red data is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select Trigger Diagnosis in Detailed Mode from the popup menu, then
select View -> Trigger Diagnosis in Detailed Mode from the menu bar.
Result: The diagnosis is executed from synthetic mode in the detailed mode.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The detailed generated report is an html page that contains hyperlinks to the network
objects of the execution context. The hyperlinks propagate to the modes and functions.
The title of the detailed diagnosis report is the short name of the diagnosis scenario name.
The following details appear:
Name of the executed diagnosis
Description and context of the triggering elements:
The target network object
The target date
The target period type.
The execution results of the nodes
Each node is detailed in a table containing the following information:
Name of the node
State of the execution
The nodes are colored depending on their status: test failed = red, test passed =
green, unknown = orange.
For each identified cause, the observations and the conclusion are detailed.
Context (iteration list values)
If an iteration variable is used, the local context contains the identifier of the
iterated object. This object identifier and its type permit to generate a hyperlink
that propagates to the mode tree.
Description of the node
Report of the execution
The conclusion contains:
The node report of the root cause node (Report true, Report false and Report
unknown)
The action associated with the root cause node.
Python code of the node (html link using external web interface).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-4: Execute diagnosis in detailed mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To enlarge the executed detailed diagnosis view to window size, double click on its title
tab, or click on the array from the splitter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display execution logs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5: Edit detailed diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.1: Edit detailed diagnosis report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.1: Edit detailed diagnosis report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The open window contains two menu tabs:
Execution context (p. 3-19)
Spatial Scope.
For information on how to edit them, refer to:
Procedure 22-5.2: Edit diagnosis execution context (p. 22-18)
Procedure 22-5.3: Edit diagnosis spatial scope (p. 22-19).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.2: Edit diagnosis execution context
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Update as appropriate the displayed fields. Refer to Execute View, in the Execution
context (p. 3-19).
Result: The diagnosis is executed only for the specific From Date. To Date is not
relevant in this case.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current view Update Diagnosis View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create Diagnosis View
Result: The tabular / graphical viewer displays the values with the new data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-5.3: Edit diagnosis spatial scope
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Remove network objects from the spatial Right click on them and select Delete.
scope
Add network objects from the spatial scope Select them and drop them to the view panel.
To Click on
Apply the changes made on the current view Update Diagnosis View
Create a new view with the performed changes Create Diagnosis View
Result: The tabular / graphical viewer displays the values with the new data.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Date tab, fill in the appropriate fields as presented in the table below.
Parameter Description
Name
Execution Date The date at which the scheduled report is executed, i.e. the report result
becomes available at the morning of this date.
The default date is the next day from the current date.
If the report repeats, then this is the first schedule date.
The date can be selected either by using the select bar, or by clicking on
and choosing it from the displayed calendar.
The date format can be configured in the user preference.
From Start date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
Execution Date in a number of days / weeks / months (according to the
selected periodicity).
Date from which the scheduled execution starts.
The default value is 1 day / week / month before the Execution Date.
At Start time of the observation period for execution.
To End date of the observation period for execution, expressed relatively to the
Execution Date in a number of days / weeks / months (according to the
selected periodicity).
The default value is 1 day / week / month before the Execution Date.
At End time of the observation period for execution.
The supported time format is hh (00 to 23) mm (00 to 59).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Data tab parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
Name
Job Title Defines the name of the job. This can be different from the report name.
Default values:
ScheduleDiagnosis, if one diagnosis scenario is selected
ScheduleMultipleDiagnosis, if several diagnosis scenarios are
selected
ScheduleDiagnosis_Repeat or ScheduleMultipleDiagnosis_
Repeat, if one or several diagnosis scenario(s) is / are selected and
repeat option other than None is selected.
Owner Defines the owner of the job.
This parameter is read-only.
Working Zone Defines the current Working Zone being used by the current user.
This parameter is read-only.
Output Format Defines the output format for the scheduled report.
Possible values:
Analysis Desktop
.html.
4 To schedule the report on an entire working zone, select Entire Working Zone.
This may be particularly useful when executing a warning report.
Result: If the report is executed on the entire working zone, then the spatial scope
contains all the network objects in the working zone of the same type as the executed
report.
For example, if the report was executed on Cell 3G's in Working Zone A, then the
spatial scope of the executed report are all the Cell 3G's that were in Working Zone A
at the time when the report was executed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Repeat tab, set the appropriate frequency for the scheduled report repetition.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
By default, the repeat option is None, so the report is only scheduled once.
6 Click on Execute.
Result: The scheduled reports are executed during the night, after the loading of
consolidation.
A report which is Scheduled and Archived is displayed in the Archived reports list;
refer to Display pending and archived executed reports (p. 19-66).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-6: Schedule executed diagnosis reports
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view or delete scheduled reports, refer to Procedure 19-6: Use job scheduler
editor (p. 19-70).
The scheduled reports purge computes the overall reports size. If this size is greater
than a configurable threshold, then it will drop oldest reports until the size goes below
the threshold.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To view one or several pending executed diagnosis reports, select them by checking the
checkbox, then click on OK.
If the scheduled report encounters an error condition during the execution of the report,
this failed job is also listed in the pending executed reports list. A dedicated column
displays the Failure Reason. When you select such a report to view, it is marked as
viewed and it is not displayed anymore next time the dialog box is opened.
All the diagnosis reports are opened one by one in a sequential order. If the diagnosis
report output is not Analysis Desktop, but html, then you are first prompted to save the
executed diagnosis report and then to open it to view it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Display pending executed diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once a diagnosis report is saved or viewed in the Analysis Desktop, then it is marked as
viewed and it no longer appears in the list of pending executed diagnosis reports. If the
current Working Zone is not the Working Zone in which the diagnosis report was
scheduled, then when displaying the executed diagnosis report, any objects not belonging
to the current Working Zone are shown as 'unknown'.
To Do
Close an executed diagnosis report in detailed Perform one of the following options:
mode Right click on the diagnosis name tab, and
select Close, OR
Select Diagnosis -> Close.
Close all executed diagnosis report in detailed Perform one of the following options:
mode Right click on the diagnosis name tab, and
select Close All, OR
Select Diagnosis -> Close All and click on
Yes at the confirmation message, OR
Click on the icon from the tool bar.
Only the completed executions are closed. The
On-going tabs for the executions which are in
progress, remain open.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To export Do
One executed diagnosis report Select the report and select Diagnosis ->
Export... from the tool bar.
Several diagnosis Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon, OR
Select Diagnosis -> Export All... from the
tool bar.
All diagnosis are exported and gathered in the
same zip file.
The diagnosis exported are all the diagnosis
that are in the active report browser (if there
are diagnosis in the 2 report browsers, only the
diagnosis belonging to the report browser of
the last report browser which were active (on
which you have clicked, move the mouse) are
exported).
This triggers an original full view export (Full
Export and not Export Display).
2 Browse for the location where to save the .html file, then give the appropriate File name.
If Export all was selected in the previous step, the export format refers to the files
contained in the .zip file.
Result: The file name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is Successfull. Do you want to open the exported file?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 22-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Diagnosis Procedure 22-7: Export diagnosis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Open the exported file Yes
The file opens in a new window.
If you do not want to open the exported file No
Result: The diagnosis report is exported to selected format, keeping the same look as
the executed diagnosis.
In the Export all case, all the diagnosis are exported in a .zip file, each diagnosis in
this zip file is in .html format keeping the same look as the executed diagnosis.
The diagnosis tool bar is not exported.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
22-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
23 Tuning
23
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to perform tuning for the radio configuration.
Contents
Presentation 23-1
Display tuning operation properties 23-4
Procedure 23-1: Use tuning session manager 23-6
Procedure 23-2: Manage tuning jobs 23-19
Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session 23-28
Procedure 23-4: Propagate from tuning session 23-62
Procedure 23-5: Manage reference object(s) for tuning 23-66
Procedure 23-6: Manage tuning inhibition of network objects 23-71
Presentation
Note: The feature described in this section is not available for WiMAX.
The MUSE_TUNING_LICENSE license be installed, so that the Tuning menu
appears in the Analysis Desktop.
The user must also have any one of the following FADs to see the Tuning menu item:
MUSE_NPO_TUNING_PREPARATION
MUSE_NPO_ADMINISTRATE_TUNING_SESSIONS
Definitions
After a network optimization session is completed, its results (monitoring QoS indicators,
checking rules on the parameters, executing diagnosis) are used to tune the radio
configuration, in order to correct the network misbehavior.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The optimizer can define radio resource configuration modifications, frequency changes,
neighborhood modifications, add adjacencies, change logical / design parameter values in
a tuning session, which is then applied on the OMC, but it depends on the technology.
The NPO allows you to copy the parameters from a cell into another cells using the
reference cell. Also you are allowed to set a cell as non-tunable cell once this cell is well
tuned.
A Tuning Session can be considered as a template. It contains tuning operations and can
be applied to create a tuning job. The limit for the number of objects for tuning session is
6000.
A Tuning Job is a particular tuning session that is applied at a given date. It contains a
copy of the tuning session used to create it. It is parsed by MAAT Tuning to be split into
different tuning tasks (one per impacted OMC). Many tuning jobs can be created from a
tuning session (one job per application of the tuning session).
A Tuning Task contains all tuning operations that are impacting one particular OMC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tuning tasks are applied, and a notification / result polling is sent to all NPO
clients.
After the tuning tasks are completed / failed, they are purged.
Follow the application of the Tuning Session on the concerned OMC.
For W-CDMA, the NPO generates a workorder which is stored in the WMS under
the following directory:
/opt/nortel/data/cmXML/ScheduledExport.
Then the operator creates a session manager in WMS in order to import this
workorder and to apply it on the NE itself.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
OMC / RNP Data Source Management.
For LTE, the NPO generates a workorder which is stored in the SAM under the
following directory:
/opt/5620sam/server/nms/activation/wo_import.
Then the operator creates a session manager on SAM in order to import this
workorder and to apply it on the NE itself.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide document, to
OMC / RNP Data Source Management.
The advanced usage of tuning is:
Select the appropriate network objects and define them as being Reference Objects.
These objects can now be used as templates when tuning other network objects.
Select the appropriate network objects and inhibit all tuning operations for them.
These objects can no longer be tuned.
The available operations depend on ownership and / or status of the tuning sessions:
If a tuning session is scheduled or applied but not yet completed / failed / partially
failed, then it can only be copied
If a tuning session is not owned by the operator (and the operator is not
Administrator), then it can only be copied or opened in read only mode
If a tuning session is owned by the operator (or the operator is the Administrator) and
is created, or completed / failed / partially failed, then it can be opened, copied,
deleted
It is always possible to creation a new tuning session
Deleting a working zone results in the automatic re-parenting of the tuning sessions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Display tuning operation properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Display tuning operation properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1: Use tuning session manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.1: Open tuning sessions window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tuning sessions are classified by working zone and are displayed in a tree format.
If the current opened working zone is the Global Working Zone, than all tuning
sessions are displayed. In other words, a tuning session is linked to two working
zones: the one from which it is created, and the Global Working Zone.
Temporary Tuning Sessions are not displayed.
The tuning sessions are classified by working zone and are displayed in a tree format.
Button Description
Name
New Creates a new tuning session.
Open Opens the description of a tuning session in the tuning session viewer. This
includes the properties and tree view of operations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.1: Open tuning sessions window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Button Description
Name
Copy Opens a copy of the selected tuning session in the tuning session viewer.
Delete Deletes the current selected tuning session(s).
Close Closes the Tuning Sessions window. This is the default button.
Help Invoke the online help for the current window. See Access online help
(p. 2-43).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.2: Display tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the appropriate tuning session(s), and double click on it or click on Open.
Result: The selected tuning session appears in the right frame.
More than one Tuning Session can be selected at a time to open. In this case, each of
the selected Tuning Sessions opens in a different tab. The maximum number of tabs is
20.
The list of tuning operations contained in the tuning session, as well as the properties
of the tuning session are displayed.
Properties of the opened Tuning Session can now be edited (see Procedure 23-3.3:
Edit tuning session properties (p. 23-36)) and Tuning Operations can be added,
deleted, or modified (see Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session (p. 23-28)).
In the Tuning Session tree, you can access the Collapse all option. For more
information, refer to Procedure 2-4.1: Collapse all in topology classification
browser (p. 2-17).
To enlarge the tuning session to window size, double click on its title tab, or click on
the array from the splitter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.3: Create tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.3: Create tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on New.
Result: A new tab is created with the template of the new tuning session, displaying
the default values of the tuning session properties. The name of the tab is the default
name associated with the new Tuning Session.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.3: Create tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Tuning Sessions window closes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.4: Create tuning session by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Edit the appropriate properties (refer to Procedure 23-3.3: Edit tuning session properties
(p. 23-36)), and add / modify / delete the required tuning operations (refer to Procedure
23-3: Edit tuning session (p. 23-28)).
Result: The tuning session is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.5: Check tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General check
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The tuning session is checked.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.5: Check tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check from open tuning session
You can also check from an open tuning session, as follows:
Click on , OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning -> Tuning Session> Check.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.6: Apply tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
From the Tuning Jobs window Select the appropriate tuning session, then:
Click on , OR
Right click and select Apply.
A confirmation message appears.
Click on Yes.
From a open tuning session From the open tuning session, then:
Click on , OR
From the menu bar, select Tuning ->
Tuning Session> Apply.
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The following message appears:
Tuning Job Created: <Tuning_Job_name>
The tuning job name must be unique (Tuning Session name + scheduled date +
applier of Tuning Session + unique ID)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The tuning session is created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.6: Apply tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tuning session job is split into tuning session tasks (one task per impacted OMC-R).
Each task contains the following information for a dedicated OMC-R:
Creation / deletion of forecast objects
Creation of relations:
Relation inside an OMC-R: Only one tuning session task is created for the
dedicated OMC-R
Relation between OMC-Rs, with both OMC-Rs managed by NPO: two tuning
session tasks are created
Relation between OMC-Rs, with one OMC-R not managed by NPO: one tuning
session task is created.
Deletion of relations
Update of parameters.
Note: The same tuning session can be updated and applied several times. For each
application, a different tuning job is instantiated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-1.7: Delete tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2: Manage tuning jobs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 23-2.6: Compare operational data with operator reference values data
(p. 23-27).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.1: Open tuning jobs window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.1: Open tuning jobs window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.1: Open tuning jobs window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 23-1 Tuning job status icon colors (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.2: Change classification in tuning jobs tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select as appropriate:
Classify by Applier of Tuning Session
Classify by Status
Classify by Working Zone.
Result: The tuning job tree is updated with the selected classification.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.3: Display existing tuning jobs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.4: Display tuning job follow up
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.5: Open tuning job(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The properties of the selected tuning job open in the Tuning Session Viewer in
read only mode. For each selected tuning job(s), the corresponding tuning session
opens in a different tab.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-2.6: Compare operational data with operator
reference values data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alcatel-Lucent Analysis Desktop window, from the menu bar, select Tuning ->
Compare Operational with Operator Reference Values.
Result: The result of the comparison is a set of differences of some parameters for
some network objects between operational data and ORV data.
The user can request to display the result of the comparison using the corresponding
menu item.
A tuning session is generated by the system and the comparison results are shown in
the tuning session browser. The Tuning Session contains one parameter tuning
operation for each difference found when comparing the operational network
comparison with the Operator Reference network configuration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3: Edit tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.1: Display tuning session operation tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
Type
Relation <serving object> <relation direction ->, <-, OR <->>
<target object> (New or Deleted)
Parameter <Parameter name as displayed in Modes & Functions Tree>
Object Name <Object name as displayed in Modes & Functions Tree>
<if New, (New) > = <old value> -> <new value>
[['Planned', 'Reference <reference object label>',
'Historical <date>' or 'Reference Value']
If the old value is equal to the new value, the entire tree label is in italics.
The last used display type (grouping by parameter, or grouping by object type) is
saved as an implicit user preferences.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.2: Display tuning synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
By Object / Parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.2: Display tuning synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To edit the displayed tuning synthesis, refer to Procedure 23-3.13: Edit tuning operation(s) (p. 23-59).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-35
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.3: Edit tuning session properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The modifications are applied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-36 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.4: Show / hide tuning session properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Show tuning session properties
Hide tuning session properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-37
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.5: Save tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The tuning session is saved and forecast parameters / topology associated with
the tuning session are created.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-38 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.6: Clear tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: All tuning operations that are part of the tuning session are removed and the
tuning session is now empty.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-39
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.7: Toggle display type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-40 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.8: Close tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Close one tuning session Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the tuning session name tab,
and select Close, OR
From the tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning
Session -> Close.
Close all tuning sessions Perform one of the following options:
Right click on the tuning session name tab,
and select Close All, OR
From the tool bar, select Tuning -> Tuning
Session -> Close All.
Result: If the closed tuning session contains not-saved modifications (tab name
contains *), then the user is prompted and can either save the tuning session before
closing it, or confirm closure and lose pending modifications.
If the closed tuning session was a temporary tuning session, then the temporary tuning
session is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-41
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Parameter Tuning Table displays the tuning values of the cells being tuned. The
tuning values include Ref. Min, Ref. Value, Ref. Max, Operational, Planned, and
Forecast values. An arrow icon indicates which line is currently being processed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-42 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Parameter Tuning Values are as follows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-43
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The window location, splitter position and window size are stored as implicit user
preferences. The parameters are displayed with OMC name or RNP name or NPO
name as per user preference.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-44 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the appropriate Parameter Tuning Value for the selected network object.
Result: If User Defined is chosen, the forecast value can be modified. In the other
cases, the forecast value is just displayed without any possibility of changing it.
To preview the value, click on Preview.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check Description
Mandatory Checks All mandatory checks linked to the tuned
parameter(s) are performed. This includes
mandatory rules referencing tuned
parameter(s), check of system min / max
bounds and check of the allowed steps when
applicable.
Optional Checks All optional checks linked to the tuned
parameter(s) are performed. This includes
optional rules referencing tuned parameter(s)
and check of reference min / max bounds.
All Checks Both mandatory and optional checks are
performed.
No Checks No checks other than the system min / max are
performed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-45
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The type of check is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on OK.
Result: The selected checks (as described in step ) are triggered, the progress bar is
displayed.
If at least one of the checks fails, then a window opens, displaying all the errors and
all the warnings returned by the checks.
The selected checks are applied only to the concerned operations (current object +
current parameter, or all objects + current parameters, or all objects + all parameters)
and not on the whole tuning session.
The window is closed and the Tuning Session Viewer is refreshed, displaying all new
created operations.
If the labels of the objects appear in italic, it means that the new value set for tuning is
the same as the initial value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-46 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.9: Create parameter tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-47
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select:
The appropriate network object(s) from the Topology browser, and
The Topology Relation Tuning Operation: Adjacencies Tuning from the Functions
window, from the Tuning tab.
Result: The required elements are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-48 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 23-5 Tuning session window - relation tuning - new object
The Direction Setting panel permits to define the type of relation that is created. It
can be:
Incoming
Outgoing
Bi-directional .
The Operational Relations panel displays the list of existing relation(s) of the
currently processed network object.
The Added Relations panel displays the list of new relation(s) to be created for the
currently processed network object.
The Removed Relations panel displays the list of relation(s) to be removed for the
currently processed network object.
The Preview of Changes panel displays how the result is after the changes are
applied.
The window location, size and the splitters' position are stored as implicit user
preferences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-49
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following Operations for Relations are available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-50 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click on Create.
Result: The Parameter Tuning window opens on the new sub-object(s).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-51
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.10: Create topology relation tuning
operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Parameter Tuning window closes, and the Relation Tuning window
comes on top. The new object is added in the Added Relations panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click on Apply.
Result: If relations are created (and not just removed), when the Relation Tuning
closes, the Parameter Tuning window opens on the new sub-object(s), so that the
operator can tune the parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-52 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select:
The appropriate cell(s) from the topology browser, and
Frequency Tuning from the Functions window, from the Tuning tab.
Result: The cells and frequency tuning are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The BSIC field displays the list of current forecast BSIC of the cell, or the operational
value if the BSIC has not been changed. This list proposes the available possible
values.
It is obtained using the following formula: BSIC = BCC + 8 x NCC, where:
BCC varies from 0 to 7
NCC can take all the values indicated by the NCC_Permitted parameter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-53
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following cell types that display different frequency tuning details are available.
The Frequency Tuning window contains one tab per traffic zone of the processed
cell. Each tab contains:
A Cell Allocation panel
This contains the list of frequencies used by the cell. Note that for multi-band cell
objects, Cell Allocation can be different in traffic zone tabs.
A Frequency Configuration panel, that can be:
TRX Configuration - when no TRX uses FHS (i.e. Hopping Group)The values
of the TRX mode are: Preference Mark, Planned, Operational, and Forecast.
FHS Configuration - when all TRX use FHSThe values of the FHS mode are:
Planned, Operational, and Forecast.
RH / NH Configuration - when some TRX use FHS and others do not.If the
selected type is TRX, the values are as for the TRX mode, but you can only
tune the BCCH frequency on the non hopping TRX.If the selected type is
FHS, the values are as for the FHS mode, but you can only tune the
frequencies on the hopping TRX.The user can change from TRX to FHS, or
from FHS to TRX (when this is available).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-54 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.11: Create Frequency Tuning Operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Only the Forecast value column is editableThe forecast value is the
operational value by default if there is no current forecast value.
A cell which displays the BCCH value is highlighted using blue color
background.
For RH / NH mode, depending on the type selected in the combo box, the cells are
displayed.
Note: The window location and size are stored as implicit user preferences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Use one of the following methods to edit the new forecast values.
Method Description
Manually Forecast frequencies can be entered manually
and, in that case, the Cell Allocation list is
updated accordingly (adding the new entered
value if required, removing the old value if not
used anywhere else).
Whenever there is an N / D in forecast
(respectively operational) and not in
operational (respectively forecast) columns,
then only the Restore operation is allowed to
fix the inconsistency.
Using drag and drop Forecast frequencies can be dragged and
dropped in order to switch them between two
TRX.
This is applicable only in the case of TRX
configuration mode.
Setting planned values Forecast frequencies can be set to planned
frequencies if available with the help of the
popup menu in the Tuning Table.
Restrictions: It is not possible to copy
planned values into forecast values in the
following cases:
When one of the planned values is either
N/Aor N / D
When the number of planned TRX is
different from number of forecast TRX
When there is an N / D value in the
Forecast value.
To set the forecast values back to the operational values, click on Restore.
Result: The forecast values are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The details of frequency tuning for the next cell are displayed.
Update the forecast values as appropriate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Apply.
Result: A confirmation message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
Result: The window closes and the Tuning Session Viewer is refreshed, displaying all
new created operations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-56 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select:
The appropriate network objects from the topology browser, and
Advice Tuning from the Functions window, from the Tuning tab.
Result: The cells and frequency tuning are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
The window location and size are stored as implicit user preferences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Save the current advice and step to the next Perform the following steps:
available network object tab Click on Apply to Current Object.
When the user is in the last object, the
Apply to Current Object label changes to
Apply.
Click on Apply to save the changes and
close the window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-57
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.12: Create advice tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Save the current advice to all the remaining Click on Apply to All Objects.
objects and close the window.
Result: The window closes and the Tuning Session Viewer is refreshed, displaying all
new created operations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-58 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.13: Edit tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-59
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.14: Copy tuning operation(s) to system
clipboard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-60 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-3.15: Delete tuning operation(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Yes.
Result: The tuning operation(s) is deleted from the tuning session.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-61
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4: Propagate from tuning session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-62 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4.1: Propagate tuning session content
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-63
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4.2: Propagate tuned parameters of network
object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-64 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-4.3: Propagate tuned network objects of
parameter(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-65
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5: Manage reference object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-66 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5.1: Declare network object(s) as reference
object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-67
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5.1: Declare network object(s) as reference
object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The following confirmation window appears:
Are you sure to save the changes?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click on Yes.
Result: The network object is set as reference object and highlighted in blue color, as
shown in the following figure:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-68 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5.1: Declare network object(s) as reference
object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The parameter is tuned using the value of the parameter from the reference object.
If the parameter tuning operation is applied on more than one network object, all these
objects are tuned with the same value (the one coming from the reference object).
A notification is sent to all clients about the new status of the concerned network
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-69
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-5.2: Undeclare network object(s) as
reference object(s) for tuning
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the network object and select Set Reference Object.
Result: The Declare / Undeclare Reference Object window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
Result: The following confirmation window appears:
Are you sure to save the changes?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected network object(s) are no longer defined as reference object(s)
and their label(s) appear in standard format.
A notification is sent to all clients about the new status of the concerned network
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-70 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6: Manage tuning inhibition of network
objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-71
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6.1: Inhibit tuning of network object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If necessary, edit the reason for the operation in the Reason panel.
If several network object(s) are selected, the same comment can be applied to all selected
objects, or you can enter a different message for each of them.
By default, the same message is applied to all selected network objects.
Result: The reason for the operation is edited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-72 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6.1: Inhibit tuning of network object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The selected network object(s) are no longer accepted for tuning, and their
label(s) appear in italic format, as shown in the following figure:
A notification is sent to all clients about the new status of the concerned network
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 23-73
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Tuning Procedure 23-6.2: Allow tuning of network object(s)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on the network object and select Set Tunable Object.
Result: The Allow / Inhibit Tuning window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK.
Result: The following confirmation window appears:
Are you sure to save the changes?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Yes.
Result: The network object(s) is now defined as tunable and its label appears in
standard format.
A notification is sent to all clients about the new status of the concerned network
object(s).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
23-74 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
24 Cartography
24
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the management of network objects and layers in a geographical
representation.
Contents
Presentation 24-2
Open cartography 24-16
Procedure 24-1: Use layer manager 24-17
Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation 24-45
Display information interactively 24-56
Minimap 24-56
Manage network objects 24-57
Procedure 24-3: Thematic Layer Template (THL) 24-65
Procedure 24-4: Execute THL 24-86
Procedure 24-5: Display thematics for adjacencies 24-92
Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use 24-93
Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend 24-95
Procedure 24-8: Export THL 24-97
Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies 24-100
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Presentation
Overview
Note: The MUSE_CARTOGRAPHY_LICENSE must be installed for the
cartography viewer to be available.
The cartography module allows you to:
Correlate the design view and the operational view
Access the topology of operational elements
Focus on faulty objects
Highlight network objects
Perform adjacency analysis and tuning
Manage background maps, as well as strongest server maps
Manage multiple map layers, including:
Network objects filtering
Use customizable rendering properties, such as overlaid raster and vector maps
Levels of details based on network object density, controlled by the operator.
View multi-technology objects for the same map.
The following table gives the definitions of the main cartography terms.
Term Definition
Raster A bitmap image consisting of a matrix of pixels.
The accepted formats for raster files are:
.jpg
.jpeg
.tif
.tiff
.png
Vector A file that contains objects and shapes using mathematical coordinate systems
and formulas.
The accepted formats for vector files are:
.mif
.mid
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Definition
Back- Used to display a set of raster and vector maps in the background, while all the
ground other layers are put in front of this one by default. This is mainly the place where
Maps satellite / aerial maps, roads, rivers, elevation maps are displayed.
The NPO imports all the available background maps for:
Vectors, in .mif format (MapInfo Interchange File format) and in the
longitude / latitude geographical WGS84 co-ordinate system
You can import the files directly from the Analysis Desktop or via web
administration tools.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide
document, to Import vector file using GUI.
Rasters, in .jpg, .jpeg, .tif, .tiff, .PNG formats and in the longitude / latitude
geographical WGS84 co-ordinate system using .txt georeference files (two
georeference points required).
You can import the files directly from the Analysis Desktop or via web
administration tools.
For more information, refer to the NPO Administration User Guide
document, to Import raster file using GUI.
Examples: A map of a country, RNP imported files such as a power map.
CCA (Cell It is a data file containing polygons (layers of georeferenced vectors) representing
Coverage surfaces associated with a network object reference, coming from RNP files that
Area) are processed at the import.
Each polygon of the files is referenced with a network Object ID. CCA Layers
contain a list of polygons with rendering properties (line color, fill color / pattern,
transparency coefficient).
CCA layers show Voronoi cells, best server files coming from RNP, or any kind
of polygon linked with a topology object reference.
There are two types of Cell Coverage Area files:
.mif and .mid files (containing polygons data), or
Computed Voronoi.
CCA layers show Voronoi cells, the best server files coming from RNP, or any
kind of polygon linked with a topology object reference.
CCA objects cannot be moved or zoomed.
The user can define which CCA is associated with the cell, by configuring the
cartography configuration file. If only one CCA is available, the Cartography
module makes this choice automatically. When at least two CCA are available,
you must define which CCA is used for this association. All CCA can be
displayed simultaneously.
DT It is a data file containing layers of the drive test files. A Drive Text file is a .mif
(Drive Test) or .mid file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Term Definition
Network The network objects from the topology classification (cell, BTS, NodeB,
Objects eNodeB) that are dropped into the cartography viewport.
This layer is further sub-layered based on the object type (e.g. Cell3G, RNC):
All the Cell3G objects are grouped into the Cell3G sub-layer
Network Objects are not displayed in this sub-layer
The Relations Layer, another sub-layer, constitutes the adjacencies present in
the viewport. Its sub-layers are grouped based on the technology.
Icon A bitmap image used to render a network object in the cartography.
Main The network object type that is the focus of a technology. Example: CELL3G for
Object W-CDMA, CELL2G for GSM, CELLLTE for LTE.
Type
Voronoi Voronoi maps are computed polygons per object, that represent a zone where a
function is maximized for the object.
A Voronoi map displays the Voronoi contours of an area covered by a cell. Each
of these areas is called a Best Server. To use a Voronoi map for Adjacency
Analysis, you must load it before you carry out the analysis.
The algorithm used for Voronoi computing is the distance, and this function is
tuned by the network object parameters.
Best Server The Best Server is a computed raster or vector file coming from RNP software.
The Best Server computes polygons for cells showing the geographic zone that is
the best telecom service. Several polygons can be set for a network object. The
Best server file comes in a MAP info of mif / mid format describing the polygon
list, the rendering attributes, and additional information on each polygon
(Network object reference).
Thematic A thematic layer graphically displays the value of parameters. It contains
Layer sub-layers by sorting criteria, containing all selected objects that match the
criteria.
An executed thematic layer is a set of network objects sorted by criteria in
sub-layers and displayed in various shapes and colors (user defined rendering).
Thematics are computed using thematic layers template and a set of network
objects for a consolidated period.
Example: a selection of cells drawn in color depending on the call drop.
Cartography browser
The Cartography browser appears as a tab in the Report browser. There can be multiple
report tabs and multiple tuning tabs, but there is only one tab for cartography.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Cartography browser consists of five regions.
Region Description
Cartog- Refer to the Tool bar (p. 24-45).
raphy
Cartog- The rendering Viewport is the main window of the cartography module; it is a
raphy drawing area showing the visible layers at their right position in the current world
View- coordinates system.
port This area displays background maps, CCA polygons, network objects, and thematic
objects. This area can be zoomed and panned.
Mini- The minimap defines the overview of the actual viewport. At any point in time, the
map entire map is visible in the mini map with a small rectangle.
Layer The layer manager contains a list of layers and sub-layers that are arranged in the
Manager hierarchical tree structure. A layer is a graphical component containing the
description of the graphical content and not the graphical content itself.
The layers can be moved up and down in the hierarchy, depending on the type of the
layers. The sub-layer within the main layer can be moved up and down, except for
the relation type and thematic layers.
The root nodes and the leaf nodes, as well as their corresponding icons are defined in
the configuration file.
Informa- The information bar shows the latitude and longitude of the cursor position in the
tion Bar map. It also contains a scale displaying the information regarding the distance of the
line when the user is in compute distance mode. The number displayed in the scale
changes dynamically when the viewport is zoomed or unzoomed.
The distance unit for the distance and scale is taken from the user preference, for
more information refer to Cartography user preferences (p. 26-10):
When the value is between 0 and 5000 meters, the unit is meters
When the value is more than 5000 meters, the unit is kilometers
When the value is between 0 and 5000 feet, the unit is feet
When the value is more than 5000 feet, the unit is changed to miles.
The user can choose to hide both the layer manager and the minimap; in this case most of
the screen space is filled with the cartography viewport. The Density Level is recalculated
and the objects are adjusted according to the new density factor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A site is a logical object, where one or more network objects are located. All the objects
that have the same geographical position (latitude / longitude) are usually grouped
together as a site.
The site is usually represented as a filled circle. It has the same latitude / longitude as that
of the objects it contains.
The site name is a parameter:
Of the cell, for W-CDMA
Retrieved from the RNP cell ID, for GSM.
When no names are available, the site name is the latitude / longitude information.
A sector is a line joining the site to the network objects. A line appears using the
cartography configuration file attributes (thickness, color, leh). The sector usually gives
the information about the azimuth of the cell.
The Azimuth is the angle of the antenna of the cells in the network. Its value is taken
from the OMC-R or RNP.
The following figure presents the site elements as displayed in the viewport.
Cells are considered to be the main object types in the viewport. They are always
displayed as hexagons. To differentiate cells of different standards, a small hexagon
containing the technology letter (G for GSM, U for W-CDMA, W for WiMAX) appears
on the lower right corner of the hexagon, as shown in the figure below.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can use the user preferences to show the standards or not:
The figure below shows the layout of a cell along with its rendering attributes:
ObjectType giving the shape
Technology represented by a symbol
Two parameters:
cellClass - background
cellType - sub-icon.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Size of the sector line: the azimuth line has a fixed graphical size, but when it is zoomed,
so when the Density Level is increased, the line is also thickened. This shows expanded
views of collapsed cells.
You can display any kind of network objects in the Cartography, given a couple of
latitude and longitude coordinates.
The NPO can display network objects coming from OMC or from RNP.
Density level
The viewport can contain thousands of objects, making the rendering of all objects along
with all their properties practically impossible. The density level is the level of details to
which the network objects are displayed in the viewport, and thus allows the user to refine
displays in the viewport.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The table below explains the density level depending on the number of objects in the
viewport.
Notes:
1. 1/2 equals half the original size.
2. 1 equals full size.
To set the density level of the network objects, choose the appropriate value from the
Density Level dropdown list in the Cartography tool bar:
To lock it to the chosen value, select the Density Lock checkbox.
Graphic modes
Depending on the of the viewport, two modes of graphic display are automatically
selected for the main object type: collapsed and full-expanded mode.
Collapsed mode
Since the viewport may contain thousands of objects, some of which are of similar type or
located in the same site and can be grouped together. In this case, they are also called
co-localized cells or collapsed cells.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Three cells of different standards (GSM, W-CDMA, WiMAX) can be co-localized. The
maximum number of cells co-localization for a given azimuth (or a sector) is:
2G: two co-localized cells
3G: four co-localized cells.
The following figure provides an example of a graphical representation of the collapsed
cells.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5. A post processing is made in order to find all the segments of a cell and to order them
so that the last point of a segment is equal to the first point of the next segment.
The polygon sizes are then adjusted to telecom constraints (umbrella, micro, macro
cells,...).
6. The Best Server contour is created.
The polygons are adjusted to represent more accurately a best server contour. To do
that the edges of the polygons are moved to the nearest circle defining the maximum
distance for a cell.
7. Cell coverage limitation takes place.
The cell coverage is limited to a maximum distance. In the cartography configuration
file, in each Voronoi layer definition, the radius of the circle is associated with the
values of a single criterion.
To check the Voronoi maps computation, view the traces in the following file:
/alcatel/muse/data/trace/MUSE_VORONOI_JOB_MUSE_0.traces
To view the Voronoi maps inside the Cartography viewport, refer to Procedure 24-1.2:
Show / hide layer (p. 24-23).
Operator Task
Administrator Tasks The Administrator tasks are as follows:
1. Import rasters, vectors and THL Template files in the database via
web administration tools.
2. Import RNP planned data files into the Muse database.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operator Task
Operator Tasks The Operator tasks are as follows:
1. Start the Analysis Desktop, choose a working zone, and open the
Cartography browser.
2. Import background, CCA or DT layers in the database directly from
the Analysis Desktop.
3. Add new graphical layers from the database to display in the
cartography viewer.
4. Add a set of Network Objects to display, by dragging and dropping
them from the topology classification into the cartography viewport.
5. Select a set of Network Objects and a thematic layer template in the
function browser. Drag and drop this double selection into the
cartography viewer and enter additional execution context such as
periodicity, start and end time.
The Analysis Desktop retrieves data from MUSE and generates the
result (called an executed thematic layer).
The Analysis Desktop renders the executed thematic view as a new
layer with sub-layers for each sorting criterion.
6. Perform the required operations with the displayed result:
Select
Pan
Zoom
Center
Compute distances
Display properties
Hide layers
Modify rendering properties.
7. Edit the executed thematic layer properties in order, for example, to
define how to display these network objects or change the execution
context.
8. If necessary, save the modified executed thematic layer as a thematic
layer template in order to be able to execute it again later without
redefining all graphical properties.
9. Select a cell and display incoming and outgoing adjacencies.
10. Launch a wizard to manage the cell adjacencies and choose to add or
remove adjacencies based on the geographical criterion.
11. Use the Highlight facility to find the set of network objects.
12. Propagate this subset of network objects to the topology manager.
13. Export the graphical results into several raster or vector formats.
The following figure shows an example of the Cartography window displaying a selected
cell and a selected adjacency.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Open cartography
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Open cartography
Open the cartography browser:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Launch Cartography, OR
Click on from the menu bar.
A set of predefined layers appears in the cartographic viewer corresponding to the current
working zone if no layers were loaded in the previous session of this working zone.
The last saved layer display configuration is retrieved from the user preferences if the
working zone has not changed. Layers are downloaded and displayed.
To enlarge the cartography window to window size, double click on its title tab, or click
on the array from the splitter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1: Use layer manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Procedure 24-1.6: Add layer in DT, CCA and background layer (p. 24-30).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Procedure 24-1.9: Correlate drive test results with NPO data (p. 24-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: Only one raster file and one georeference data file is allowed to import.
Both the raster file and georeference data file are mandatory.
The supported formats for raster file are: .PNG, .TIFF and .JPEG, and for the
georeference file are .rast and .txt.
If you type the name of a layer that already exists in the database, a confirmation window
appears. Click on Yes to update the layer from the database with the new layer.
Result: The raster and the georeference files to load are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The background layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you type the name of a layer that already exists in the database, a confirmation window
appears. Click on Yes to update the layer from the database with the new layer.
Result: The files to load are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The background layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The files to load are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The CCA layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Import DT layer
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.1: Load layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The layer name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Load.
Result: The DT layer is loaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.2: Show / hide layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For the defined layers, the layer manager tree disposes of a V checkbox, representing the
visibility option.
To Do
Show a layer in the viewport Select its corresponding Visible checkbox.
Hide a layer from the viewport Deselect its corresponding Visible checkbox.
Refer to Filter network objects in a layer (p. 24-62) for a table with all the objects in
the Cartography Layers and the availability of their visibility checkboxes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example: The following figures show the background and network object layer
legend dialog.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-7 Network object layer legend dialog
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.4: Modify layer display properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If all layers have the same value, then all their labels are displayed in black.
If the layers have different values for an attribute, then the label for that attribute
appears in blue, to indicate that the values are not same for all the selected layers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.4: Modify layer display properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The Contrast and Brightness can only be applied to raster files. For all other
types of layers, these fields are greyed.
Result: The parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: All the modifications done for the layer are saved as the implicit user
preference.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.5: Modify layer order
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To modify the order of a layer in the same group, select the required layer.
Result: The layer is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use the icon to drag and drop the layer to the required position.
Note: The order of sub-layers belonging to the thematic layers cannot be changed.
Result: All the modifications done for the layer are saved as the implicit user
preference.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.6: Add layer in DT, CCA and background
layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate imported layer, choose the background, the DT or the CCA type,
then click on OK.
Result: The layer is downloaded into the cartography and is added in the layer
manager tree, at the top of the layer type sub-tree.
Whenever a DT layer is added, lines between the drive test points / objects and their
referenced network objects are shown if the Show DT Lines option is checked in the
User Preference. Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences (p. 26-2).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.7: Add layer in network object layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Drag and drop the appropriate network objects from the Modes and Functions tree into
the layer manager.
Result: A new layer is created for each newly dropped object type. For example,
when dropping Cell3G objects, if the Cell3G sub-layer is not present in the network
object layer, then a new sub-layer is created for Cell3G and the objects are added in
the Cell3G layer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop the appropriate adjacencies from the Modes and Functions tree into the
layer manager.
Result: The adjacencies and their corresponding network objects are added to the
viewport.
To view the adjacencies in the viewport, right click on a network object and choose to
Procedure 24-9.2: Display adjacencies (p. 24-109), or choose to Procedure 24-9.5:
Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create / Delete Adjacencies (p. 24-114).
The network objects are not visible in the layer manager, but the cell objects are
rendered in the viewport.
Whenever a new sub-layer is added in the network object layer, the parameters (only
those that have enumerations) for the object type is fetched and displayed as the
children of the sub-layer node in the tree.
For each parameter, all the enumeration values are added in the tree as sub-node of
the parameters. All these have checkboxes in the tree table, so you can shown / hide
them in the viewport. Refer to Filter network objects in a layer (p. 24-62).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.8: Add layer in thematic layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network objects and a thematic template in the Layer Manager.
Result: The appropriate network objects and a thematic template in the Layer
Manager are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop the appropriate network objects and a thematic template in the Layer
Manager.
Result: If a layer is not already there for the thematic template, a new layer is created
in the layer manager and network objects are sorted in the thematic layer based on the
criterion defined in the THL template.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.9: Correlate drive test results with NPO
data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 The Drive Test vector map appears in the cartography viewport, with thematic showing
QoS values on the cells / adjacencies.
Select the corresponding cell of the measure in the drive test points.
Result: The required cell is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Use thin lines to associate the points of the drive test with the corresponding cells.
Result: The points of the drive test are associated with the corresponding cells.
The figure below shows all the handover of the test drive. The line color can be
modified in the configuration file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.9: Correlate drive test results with NPO
data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.10: Remove layer from layer manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on Yes.
Result: The selected layer(s) is removed from the layer manager tree and the memory
is freed. The layer is also removed from the Cartography viewport.
The layer is not removed though from the database. The new layer list is stored in the
implicit user preferences so that when Cartography module is restarted only the new
list is reloaded.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-35
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.11: Delete layer
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the layer manager, select the main layer node (Background, CCA or DT) and:
Right click and, from the popup menu, select Delete Layer..., OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Delete Layer....
Result: The Delete Layer From Database window opens, displaying the list of layers
which can be deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the layer / layers you want to delete and click on OK.
If you want to delete layers of a different type than the ones displayed in the list, change
the type from the Layer Type combo box.
Result: The Delete Layer(s) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-36 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-37
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Export possibilities:
Layer type Full Layer Export Viewport Export All Network Objects
and Thematic
Export
PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid /
mif (1.) mif mif
Raster Yes No No Yes No No No No No
Vector No No Yes Yes No No No No No
Network No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Objects
Executed THL No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Notes:
1. Since a PNG export is an image grab of the cartography viewport, when one layer is
captured as PNG, all other layers that are visible in the viewport are also captured, therefore,
a PNG viewport export on one layer cannot be done. It is always on multiple layers.
3 In the Save window, choose the location where to save the exported file, then click on
Save.
Result: The following message appears.
Export is Successful. Do you want to open the exported file?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-38 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Procedure 24-1.12: Export displayed layers / viewport (p. 24-37) in .KMZ format.
Result: The displayed layers or viewport are exported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-39
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A line appears using the cartography configuration file attributes (thickness, color,
leh).
The leh is static, configurable only in the cartography configuration file. A
multiplier factor is used with the configuration file sector leh.
The main object type of the technology is exported as rasters (one raster per
sector).
The azimuth is used as name of the cell group.
The raster is generated per sector and put in the images repository of the export.
Depending on the level of detail defined in the .KMZ file, two levels of details are
rasterized:
The expanded mode
The collapsed mode.
The cell background is also exported.
Only the visible objects are exported; filtered objects are ignored.
Transparency / contrast / brightness is ignored for Network Objects.
Special thematic rendering modes (mobile, standard deviation and Voronoi) are
not exported.
Adjacencies are not exported.
If all the objects in the cell group are not visible (because the filtering checkboxes
or main layer visibility feature are on), their corresponding site, sector and
thematics are not exported.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-40 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-11 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-41
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-12 Example of Site Exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed
Figure 24-13 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where
cells are not shown
The left panel, Places, presents the exported KMZ file, with associated azimuths.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-42 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-43
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-1.13: Google earth export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-44 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points / network objects (p. 24-54).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tool bar
The following tool bar icons are available for the cartography operations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-45
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Single selection
Select an object Click on .
If you click on a collapsed object, all the
objects inside the collapsed graphic objects are
selected.
Deselect the object or append to the current Press the Ctrl key.
selection The selection list is updated.
Circular selection
Use the circular selection mode Click on then draw a circle in the viewport.
All the objects in the drawn circle are selected.
Note: The objects in the viewport are selected only if their selection field in the layer
manager is enabled; refer to Filter network objects in a layer (p. 24-62).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-46 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2: Use cartography navigation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When there is a high density of objects, some of the objects are not displayed, or they are
shown as points, in which case no selection is shown.
The selection color of the network objects can be configured in the user preferences.
Refer to Chapter 26, User preferences.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-47
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.1: Use pan rendering viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To pan:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Export..., OR
Click on .
Result: The minimap appear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the minimap, click and hold the left mouse button, then drag to the required direction.
Result: Both the minimap and viewport are moved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-48 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Zoom in You can:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Zoom Plus...,
OR
Right click in the viewport and select Cartography ->
Zoom Plus..., OR
Click on , OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the wheel of the mouse
down.
The zooming percentage is set in the User Preferences
window.
Zoom out You can:
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Zoom
Minus..., OR
Right click in the viewport and select Cartography ->
Zoom Minus..., OR
Click on , OR
Press the Ctrl key and move the wheel of the mouse up.
The zooming percentage is set in the User Preferences
window.
Zoom in rectangular mode Click on the icon, and then hold the left mouse button
and drag it to create a rectangle.
This defines the amount of viewport pixels in both axis of
the displacement.
The viewport is zoomed in only for the drawn area. You can
then move or enlarge / decrease the rectangular
zone.
The following figure shows successive zoom actions. The first two views show fixed
sized sectors and icons. The last zoom displays the cells grouped in a sector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-49
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-50 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figures summarize a display with real cells.
Figure 24-17 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail expanded
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-51
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.2: Zoom in / out / rectangular
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-18 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail collapsed
Figure 24-19 Example of site exported in Google Earth at level of detail where
cells are not shown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-52 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.3: Center viewport
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-53
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points /
network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-54 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.4: Compute distance between points /
network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-55
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-2.5: Navigate in viewport records
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Minimap
The Minimap displays in a limited graphical zone the whole displayed area, with a
rectangular area representing the current viewport zone. The background content is a
global view of the background layer currently drawn.
The minimap window displays the main viewport area of the main rendering window
using a white rectangular zone which is not filled.
The size of the minimap window depends on the size of the Analysis Desktop but is set as
a percentage of the current cartographic viewport.
The minimap shows the background layers in the world coordinates and the zoom level of
the minimap is always set to display all visible background layers within the minimap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-56 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Minimap
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Whenever the operator changes the viewport co-ordinates or the zoom on the viewport, it
is reflected in the mini map.
Show / hide minimap
Perform one of the following options:
Click on the icon from the Cartography tool bar, OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Show / Hide Minimap.
The minimap window is shown / removed from the cartography browser.
Whenever the minimap is shown, the minimap rectangle is updated to show the current
viewport coordinates. The density factor is recalculated and the objects are adjusted
according to the new density factor. The level of details changes according to the new
density level.
Navigate to position through minimap
Select a point in the minimap window by clicking on it. The rendering viewport is
updated (panned) so that the new center of the viewport is the selected point in the
minimap.
To Do
Select a network object Click on the object.
Add / remove an object in the current selection Perform one of the following options:
Press Ctrl and click on the object, OR
Create an interactive rectangular surface
over the objects to be selected, by pressing
the left button of the mouse.
Remove objects from the selection Right click on the objects and select UnSelect
All.
Select all the objects of a collapsed graphic Click on the collapsed objects.
Select a set of objects Click on the network object layer.
Configure the selection color Perform one of the following options:
Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user
preferences (p. 26-2), to the Selection
Color option, OR
Define the selection in the cartography
configuration file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-57
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Convert one (or several) highlighted object(s) Right click on the object(s) and select:
into selected one(s) Convert to Selection -> Append to
Selection, to add the selected object(s) to
the selected list
Convert to Selection -> Replace
Selection, to make the previously selected
object(s) lose the selection and to select
the new object(s).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-58 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each adjacency, the packed link is computed if required:
The source object density level rendering mode and target density level graphic object
are determined
If there is already a packed link between the source and target graphic object, the
adjacency is added in the list and the number of links is updated on the packed link
If there is already a single link in the same direction between the source and target
graphic object, the current single link is destroyed and a packed link is created with
the two adjacencies in it.
For the network objects that do not have coordinates or which cannot be calculated, an
error dialog appears, displaying the non-computed object IDs.
Adjacencies do not have any co-ordinates, but they have the source and target objects,
therefore they can still be displayed in the viewport.
If the filtering is applied in the layer manager for the dragged and dropped network
objects, they are not shown in the viewport.
Depending on the user preferences, whenever new objects are added to the viewport, their
operational value or planned value are displayed first
Their density level is also updated based on the current density level selection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-59
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For network objects:
If there are no more network objects in the site, the site is removed from the rendering
viewport
If there are no more network objects in the layer manager, the layer is removed from
the layer manager
If there are no more network objects on an Azimuth line, the Azimuth line is removed
If the removed network object was co-localized, the co-localized group is updated and
the viewport is refreshed. If the collapsed group has only one object in it, the
collapsed object is replaced by the expanded object.
Incoming relations and outgoing relations of the removed network objects are also
removed from the adjacency layer and from the rendering viewport.
For adjacencies: if there are no more adjacencies in a packed link, the packed link is
destroyed.
When a network object is removed from the viewport, the corresponding THL objects
will also be removed from the viewport.
When the objects are removed from the viewport, density level is recomputed and the
objects are rendered according to new density level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-60 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Highlight network objects
Perform the following tasks:
1. Select one or several network objects in the viewport, then:
Right click and select Highlight, OR
From the menu bar, select Cartography -> Highlight.
2. Select as appropriate one of the following options.
To Select
Highlight all parent objects All Parent Objects
Highlight all children objects All Children Objects
Highlight all incoming adjacencies All Incoming Adjacencies
Highlight all outgoing adjacencies All Outgoing Adjacencies
Highlight all adjacencies All Adjacencies
Highlight all cells that are interfered by the Interfered -> Co-channel Probability
current selected cell with co-channel
probability *
Highlight all cells that can interfere with the Interfering -> Co-channel Probability
current selected cell with co-channel
probability *
Highlight all cells that can interfere with the Interfering -> Adjacent Channel
current selected cell with Adjacent channel Probability
probability *
Highlight all cells that are reusing frequency Frequency Reusing Objects
in a specified radius around the
corresponding network object
Highlight the CCA Highlight CCA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-61
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To convert one (or several) highlighted object(s) into selected one(s), right click on them
and select one of the following options.
To Do
Configure the selection color Perform one of the following options:
Refer to Procedure 26-1: Configure user
preferences (p. 26-2), to the Selection
Color option, OR
Define the selection in the cartography
configuration file.
Convert one (or several) highlighted object(s) Right click on the object(s) and select:
into selected one(s) Convert to Selection -> Append to
Selection, to add the selected object(s) to
the selected list
Convert to Selection -> Replace
Selection, to make the previously selected
object(s) lose the selection and to select
the new object(s).
Un-highlight objects Right click on the objects and select
UnHighlight All.
Checkbox Description
Select Check the Select checkbox in the Select
column to select all the network objects that
are the children of the selected node in the
tree.
If the selected node is the leaf node, then that
particular category of network objects are
shown in the viewport immediately.
Visible Check the Visible checkbox in the Visible
column to show all the network objects that
are the children of the selected node in the tree
in the viewport immediately.
If the selected node is the leaf node, then that
particular category of network objects are
shown in the viewport immediately.
When all the objects on the sector line become
invisible, then the sector line itself becomes
invisible.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-62 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following figure shows a example screen with the corresponding checkboxes.
Function Description
OR Between the sub-values of the same parameter.
AND Between the values of the different parameters.
The network objects are displayed in the viewport only if they satisfy the filtering criteria
in the layer manager. The selection and visibility filter is applied to all the objects that are
added to the viewport.
The select and visible checkboxes are not available for some of the tree nodes. In this
case, the component is not present in the layer manager. Refer to the following table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-63
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Manage network objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-64 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3: Thematic Layer Template (THL)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-65
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.1: Display THL properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a THL template from the function tree, right click and select Display THL
Properties.
Result: The THL Properties page opens in an html browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can display and edit the following properties pages; refer to Procedure 3-2: Display
and edit properties (p. 3-7) for more information:
Generic Thematic Layer Template definition
Attributes of rendering mode
Graphical properties of a THL
Attributes of interval distribution (steps and colors)
Graphical properties of adjacency.
Result: The required properties page is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-66 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.2: Propagate THL to function tree
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Drag and drop them to another target function of the same mode.
A THL can be propagated to:
Indicator - to retrieve all indicators referenced in the selected Thematic Layer
Templates
Design Parameter - to retrieve all design parameters referenced in the selected
Thematic Layer Templates
Logical Parameter - to retrieve all logical parameters referenced in the selected
Thematic Layer Templates.
Result: The THL templates are propagated accordingly.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-67
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.3: Open THL editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-68 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-69
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-70 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: On the right panel, the system shows:
Available indicators sorted by structure type and then by family (you can select
both visible and invisible)
Available design / logical parameters sorted by family / sub-family
Available rules.
The left panel shows the existing THL templates.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-71
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-72 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can define a minimum of one criterion and a maximum of two criteria. To add a new
criterion to the thematic template, click on Add Criterion.
When there are two criteria in the THL template, then the Add Criterion button is
disabled.
Whenever a user adds or removes a criterion, all the graphical properties of the criterion
level and the step level properties are reset.
The criterion can be a function selected from the available functions of the:
Object Type
Parent of the Object Type. In this case the parent Object Type is chosen from the
available parents Object Type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-73
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The criteria are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-74 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The parameter criterion properties are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-75
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If Special rendering mode is selected, then in the graphical properties two more shapes
are displayed:
Mobile
Standard deviation.
You must select the positioning algorithm and check / uncheck the Show Link checkbox.
Whenever special rendering mode is checked or unchecked, all the criterion of the
graphical properties and step level properties are reset.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-77
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-78 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Use the Interval Distribution to create automatic step values and colors:
Select one of the possible values (Linear, Logarithmic, Exponential)
Select the Number of Intervals if you want to compute steps automatically.
If the selected function ID is a parameter and if the parameter has enumerations, then the
steps are automatically adjusted to have same number as the number of enumerations in
the parameter. In this case, you are not allowed to enter Interval Distribution, or the
number of steps, or the boundary parameters.
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-79
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.4: Create THL Template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you enter the number of steps as four and the type of distribution as Linear, and then
click on Auto Background, a total of four steps are added in the distribution steps. If you
enter minimum and maximum values, those values are distributed for each step based on
the selected type of distribution (linear in this case). Auto Background is disabled if you
selected the background in criterion graphical properties.
Result: The Interval Distribution parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Click on .
Result: When all verified data is correct, a confirmation message asks whether the
THL template is to be saved or not.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click on OK.
Result: The THL template is created in the MUSE database and the Thematic Layer
Template is added in the function trees.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-80 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.5: Create THL template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Thematic Template Editor window, select the THL to copy, then click on .
Result: The new THL template is created with a default name:
<oldname>_Copy_n, where n is an incremental number to define a unique name.
The THL Template Properties window is filled with the with the current properties of
the template, except for the name and owner.
Access rights are reset to the default values, but you can change them as required.
The user becomes the owner of the THL template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-81
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.6: Edit THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on OK in the confirmation window, then click on Close to close the Thematic
Template Editor window.
Result: The THL template is edited.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-82 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.7: Delete THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-83
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.8: Export THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select one or more THL templates from the THL template tree of the THL Template
editor.
Result: The THL template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the THL(s) and give the appropriate File Name.
Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is done successfully.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml THL dictionary containing only
the selection. The file is exported in the location defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The exported file can be re-imported on another system at the same plug installation level
(same system dictionaries) using NPO Import/Export Management web pages. Refer to
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import THL template dictionary using
GUI procedure.
If some of the exported THL templates are referencing customer objects, a warning dialog
is displayed indicating that the exported THL templates may not be imported on another
system if the embedded customer objects are not also exported and imported on the other
system before the import of these THL templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-84 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-3.8: Export THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The warning dialog also lists all the concerned customer objects and a Propagate button
is available to allow propagating them into the corresponding functions trees. Then, from
the corresponding function tree, the user can open the corresponding editor (by a right
click) and export these customer functions.
Refer to:
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Export QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import parameter rules using GUI
Note: When a multi selection is done in a function tree of the Analysis Desktop and
the corresponding editor is opened from that tree (by a right click), the complete
selection is propagated in the editor (not only the first object).
Only the first object of the selection remains detailed in the edition part of the editor
window (as when doing a multi-selection directly in the left tree of an object editor).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-85
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4: Execute THL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Procedure 24-4.2: Edit executed THL template by dialog box (p. 24-89).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-86 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network object(s) from the topology tree and one THL template
from the function tree, then drag and drop them into the cartography viewport.
Result: The Execution Context window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-87
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-88 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.2: Edit executed THL template by dialog
box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Right click on a THL layer in the layer manager and select Executed THL....
Result: The Executed THL Properties window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-89
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.2: Edit executed THL template by dialog
box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Option Description
Create a new THL layer with the new changes Click on Create THL.
A new THL layer is created in the layer
manager and the thematic objects are rendered
in the viewport.
Apply the changes to the current executed Click on Execute.
layer All thematic objects of the previous template
are updated with the new properties of the
template.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-90 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-4.3: Execute specific THL template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the appropriate network objects and one specific THL template, then and drag and
drop them into the cartography viewer.
Result: The Specific Execution Context window appears.
This is built dynamically, based on the specific THL template.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-91
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-5: Display thematics for adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the appropriate adjacencies and the newly created THL, then drag and drop them in
the cartography viewport, to execute the THL.
Refer to Procedure 24-4.1: Execute THL template (p. 24-87).
Result: The thematics are displayed for the dropped adjacencies.
The executed THL adjacencies are shown under the THL layer and all the NO
Adjacencies dropped along with THL template are displayed under the Relations layer
of the NO layer grouped by the type of the adjacency.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-92 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Color Definition
Red Ncell BCCH is a co-channel frequency with at least one frequency of
studied cell.
Orange Ncell TCH is a co-channel frequency with at least one frequency of studied
cell.
Yellow Ncell BCCH is an adjacent channel frequency with at least one frequency of
studied cell.
Green Ncell TCH is an adjacent channel frequency with at least one frequency of
studied cell.
1 Select a network object in the viewport, then right click and select Highlight ->
Frequency Reusing Objects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-93
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-6: Manage frequency re-use
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Input window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Type the appropriate radius of the circle that forms the geographic area under to have the
frequency re-use.
3 Click on OK.
Result: The request is sent to the server to get the frequency re-used objects. The
viewport is then updated and the network object is highlighted in the appropriate color
code.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-94 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select a THL.
Result: The THL is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-95
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-7: Show THL legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-24 Example THL template with two criteria legend
The thematic symbol represents a label giving information about the thematic symbol.
The criterion 1 step value column gives information about the graphical properties
used in the criterion 1 step value.
The criterion 2 step value column gives information about the graphical properties
used in the criterion 2 step value.
For more information, refer to Procedure 24-1.3: Display layer legend (p. 24-24).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-96 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-8: Export THL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-97
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-8: Export THL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Export possibilities:
Layer type Full Layer Export Viewport Export All Network Objects
and Thematic
Export
PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid / PNG KMZ mid /
mif (1.) mif mif
Raster Yes No No Yes No No No No No
Vector No No Yes Yes No No No No No
Network No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Objects
Executed THL No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Notes:
1. Since a PNG export is an image grab of the cartography viewport, when one layer is
captured as PNG, all other layers that are visible in the viewport are also captured, therefore,
a PNG viewport export on one layer cannot be done. It is always on multiple layers.
3 In the Save window, choose the location where to save the exported file, then click on
Save.
Result: The following message appears.
Export is Successful. Do you want to open the exported file?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The export is saved accordingly.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-99
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adjacency representation
Standalone links
This link is a Bezier Curve with an arrow at its center to give the direction.
When there is the same link in the opposite direction (Adj1 source = Adj2 target and Adj2
source = Adj1 target), only one link appears and two arrows are displayed in the opposite
direction.
When displaying object properties for bi-directional links, the objects properties are
shown for both adjacencies objects.
The color of the link is set in the cartography configuration file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-100 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-101
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-26 Bi-directional adjacencies representation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-102 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-27 Non co-localized cells in full-expanded / expanded rendering mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-103
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The list of links in the packed link can be displayed in a popup window.
The graphic source / target is the rendering mode of an object:
Full Expanded colocalized objects
Expanded colocalized objects
Collapsed objects
Object icon.
Figure 24-29 Packed links for colocalized cells in collapsed rendering mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-104 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 24-30 Packed links for colocalized cells in expanded rendering mode
The packed links are used to render also the adjacencies between sectors or between sites.
In this case, packed links can be bi-directional.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-105
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-106 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9: Manage adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-107
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.1: Select adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Select a single direction adjacency Click on the line or on the arrow to select it.
Select a bi-directional adjacency Click on the arrow of the adjacency.
One direction adjacency (source or target) is
selected.
If you select the right line from a cell, the
outgoing adjacency is selected.
If you select the left line from a cell, the
incoming adjacency is selected.
Select packed links Select all the links in one direction.
Select one or more links inside the packed Perform the following tasks:
links objects 1. Procedure 24-9.4: Open packed link
content (p. 24-113) window.
2. Select one or more links inside the list.
If you select the right line from a site, the
outgoing adjacencies are selected.
If you select the left line from a site, the
incoming adjacencies are selected.
Select multiple adjacencies Select in the viewport.
2 You can configure the selection color, either from the user preferences menu or in the
cartography configuration file.
Result: The selection color is configured.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-108 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.2: Display adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-109
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.3: Display adjacency properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click and select Properties... from the popup menu; refer also to .
Result: The Object Properties window opens with the properties of the selected
adjacency.
If you change the selection, the Object Properties window is updated with the new
selection properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-110 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.3: Display adjacency properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-111
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.3: Display adjacency properties
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-112 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.4: Open packed link content
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-113
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.5: Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create
/ Delete Adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
U_TIMEADVANCE: Operational value of the U_TIMEADVANCE of the selected cell
Operational (in unity, and in parentheses the equivalent values in meters).
The operational value is multiplied by the radius, and is considered
as the radius for the Adjacency wizard calculations.
U_TIMEADVANCE is not used for W-CDMA, LTE and WIMAX.
U_TIMEADVANCE: Planned value of U_TIMEADVANCE of the selected cell (in unity,
Planned and in parentheses the equivalent values in meters).
Circle: Center The circle center is either the site location or the Voronoi
barycentre. If there is no Voronoi map, the choice is the site
location (by default the site is proposed).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-114 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.5: Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create
/ Delete Adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Description
Circle: Radius The default value (of radius) associated with the cell class of the
selected cell.
The Radius of the circle can be defined as:
U_TIMEADVANCE - writes the distance in meters or in feet
associated with the operational U_TIMEADVANCE value
The operational value is multiplied by the radius, and is
considered as the radius for the Adjacency wizard calculations.
Cell Class Radius - writes the distance associated with the
cell class.
An edit area allows to enter the value in meters or feet for the circle
radius. By default, this edit box contains the value in meters
associated with the operational U_TIMEADVANCE value.
This value is then considered as the radius for Adjacency wizard
calculations.
Deletion Filter Parameter or Indicator Name indicate if this function criterion is
activated or not.
Operator Field list the possible operators allowed for the function
criterion (parameter / indicator).
Operator Value indicate the threshold value of the function.
With HO filter When the With HO filter checkbox is activated, the type of traffic
density becomes editable.
If the default traffic density Low Usage is checked, you can choose
among one of the two possibilities proposed on the left of this
checkbox. The OFF position resets the filter.
HO traffic is not used for W-CDMA, LTE and WIMAX.
Adjacency Analysis This area summarizes the information concerning the last analysis
applied, with the number of adjacencies removed, added, and the
total of forecast ones.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-115
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.5: Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create
/ Delete Adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following rules apply:
If there were no adjacencies between two network objects, and you clicked on
Update, and the network object lies inside the circle, adjacencies proposed for
addition are drawn on both directions between these cells. If there already is only
one adjacency between the cells, then only one adjacency, which is proposed for
addition, is drawn in the reverse direction.
The Operational cells are represented by a continuous line, and the
non-operational cells by a dotted line.
All planned adjacencies are represented by thick lines, and the not-planned
adjacencies are represented by thin lines.
A circle is drawn with the specified radius, centered as the user has specified (on
Site location or on the Voronoi Barycenter).
The incoming and outgoing adjacencies that are already displayed in the viewport
are changed to green and red colored lines. Green lines are all candidates for
addition and red lines are all candidates for deletion.
You can select either green or red line and choose to remove the proposal (either
addition or deletion) from the list.
The list below explains the details of the contextual menu that appears on the
objects.
To Do
Create a new proposed adjacency Select the cell for which to create the new
adjacency, then right click and select
Adjacency Management -> Add to
Addition List -> Incoming / Outgoing.
Up to 25 adjacencies can be defined per
sector.
Delete a proposed adjacency Select the cell whose adjacency to delete,
then right click and select Adjacency
Management -> Add to Deletion List ->
Incoming / Outgoing.
Delete an existing adjacency Select it, then right click and select
Adjacency Management -> Add to
Deletion List.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-116 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.5: Run Adjacency Analysis Wizard to Create
/ Delete Adjacencies
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Remove a proposed adjacency creation / Perform one of the following
deletion options:Select the cell whose adjacencies
you proposed for creation /
deletion, then right click and
select Adjacency Management
-> Remove from the Proposal
-> Incoming / Outgoing, OR
Select the adjacency you proposed
for creation / deletion, then right
click and select Adjacency
Management -> Remove from the
Proposal.
If the graphic object is a packed link or the collapsed objects, open first the dialog
to select the individual objects inside the group and then do the operation on the
selected object.
In the Packed link dialog, for the adjacencies that are proposed for addition and
deletion, the Highlight and Select columns have the same background color as the
adjacency color.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To add the new values and proposals of creation / deletion of adjacencies to a tuning
session, select it from the available dropdown list in Choose Tuning Session, then click
on Send to tuning.
Result: The Relation Tuning window opens and you can apply the tuning session.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-117
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.6: Filter adjacencies using function criteria
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-118 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.7: Set adjacency wizard radius circle
interactively
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on Update to launch the new proposals computing using the new radius and current
function criteria configuration.
Result: The deletion and addition proposal is updated with the new radius.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 24-119
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Cartography Procedure 24-9.8: Show legend
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an adjacency.
Result: The adjacency is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
24-120 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
25 Alerters
25
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to display and manage alerters in NPO.
Contents
Presentation 25-1
Procedure 25-1: Use alerter editor 25-12
Display and use alerter list 25-35
Display and use alerts list 25-38
Presentation
Note: The Alerters feature is not available for B10 GSM.
The MUSE_ALERTER_LICENSE must be installed for the Alerter related featured
to be available.
The 1/4 Hour periodicity is not available for GSM.
Definition
Alerters are defined to detect QoS problems and generate QoS alarms in the OMC, on the
basis of reported Performance Measurement data, and then automatically loaded to the
NPO. They are calculated from indicators. If an indicator used in the alerter is modified,
this modification is taken into account.
Alerters have the following associated attributes:
Name
Alarm ID
Predicates
Validity and stability conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the end of each PM reporting period, the loader processes algorithms on these alerters,
using thresholds and validity conditions, to detect the appearance or suppression of an
alarm.
NPO alerters are not evaluated in real time, as are the OMC alerters. The minimum
supported evaluation period is one hour to evaluate hourly indicator values.
Alerters can be:
System defined, when they are delivered with the system and only some parameters
may be customized by the operator
Operator defined, and can be created from any Performance Indicator and are fully
managed by the operator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For example, if the evaluation periodicity is one hour and P=4, the observation period is
equal to four hours. If the evaluation periodicity is 1/4 hour and P=3, the observation
period is equal to 3 quarters of hour (45 minutes).
Example of variation computation with P=9 and Q=3:
For an hourly case (periodicity hour), to check if an alert is raised at 13h, the NPO
considers the indicator values at 1h (I=12), 2h (I=14) and 3h (I=16) for computing F, and
the indicator values at 10h, 11h and 12h for computing L.
Points value for F: 12, 14 and 16. For each algorithm, F is:
Average: F = (12+14+16) / Q = 14
Min: F = 12
Max: F = 16
Sum: F = 42.
Points value for L: 8, 7 and 9. For each algorithm, L is:
Average: L = (8+7+9) / Q = 8
Min: L = 7
Max: L = 9
Sum: L =24.
The variation coefficient is S =sign* (L-F) / F, where sign is an integer such that:
sign upperIsFault
true false
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
improvement 1 +1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The same principle applies with day periodicity. If the observation period provided by
the user is equal to one week, then the real observation period is equal to 1 week +
smoothing period, in order to be able to compare the indicator value at the same day
but of the previous week.
Complex alerters
Complex alerters generate alerts in the case where a formula predicate is evaluated to
true.
This predicate is constructed with a formula using multiple indicators. There is no limit to
the number of indicators involved in the formulas.
The formula can use simple arithmetical and logical operators. There is no limit to the
number of terms involved in the formulas.
For example, an alert is generated if ((I1 + I2 +I3)==0) && ((I1 + I2 + I4 + I5) > 5).
The stability parameter is used as for standard alerters.
Multiple severities
Multiple severities can be defined for an alerter with different criteria.
The supported severities are:
Critical
Major
Minor.
It is not mandatory to define all of the severities; only one among these three is
mandatory.
Cleared defines the case when the alert is removed.
Alerter states
Three alerter states are used to manage the QoS alerter:
Active
The alerter is enabled and may raise or clear alarms.
Inactive
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The alerter is disabled. There is no alarm on this alerter. The alerter is created in the
deactivated state. It can only be deleted in this state.
Failed
If a problem occurs during the alerter evaluation, the alerter is deactivated and the
state becomes Failed.
Scenario 2
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Day
Validity period: Tuesday, Friday
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter activation: Monday (30-July-2007)
Scenario 3
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Hour
Validity period: 10.00 to 12.00
Repetition: 1
Alerter activation: 09.45 (30-July-2007)
Scenario 4
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Hour
Validity period: 09.00 to 12.00
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter activation: 09.45 (30-July-2007)
Scenario 5
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Week
Repetition: 1
Alerter activation: Monday (30-July-2007)
Scenario 6
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Week
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter activation: Monday (30-July-2007)
Scenario 7
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Month
Repetition: 1
Alerter activation: Monday (30-July-2007)
Scenario 8
Alerter Type: Standard
Periodicity: Month
Repetition: 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alerter activation: Monday (30-July-2007)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Presentation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check for validity on Saturday = OK. Evaluate alerter => next check to be done in
two days
No check for validity on Sunday.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1: Use alerter editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Procedure 25-1.11: Use default alerters to detect BSC without traffic (p. 25-33).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.1: Open alerter editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor window, select Templates tab in the left panel and click on .
Result: The Alerter Template Type window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The displayed fields to update vary depending on the Alerter Type.
At least one severity must be chosen for the created alerter.
For a Standard Alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the appropriate Smoothing Period. This represents the number of periods
required to compute the first and last value of the curve.
The value of the Smoothing Period must be less than the Observation Period value.
Refer to Types, severities and states (p. 25-2) for more information about this
option.
Select Hour or Day in the dropdown list. This enables the user to define the variation
alerter according to the comparison of the last hourly (or daily) value of the indicator
with the indicator value at same type of periodicity (hourly or daily) but for n
observation period units ago.
Example: the hourly value 30 hours ago or the hourly value at same hour but ten days
ago, or the daily value seven days ago or the daily value at same day but three weeks
ago.
All the observation period limits are configurable in the Analysis Desktop properties
file.
Select the Smooth Only With Past Values. This means that the smoothing period is
only used in old (past) values to calculate the first value.
Select the Delta in Percentage. This defines the delta that is used to determine if an
alert needs to be generated. The value can be positive or negative.
Select the appropriate Algorithm from the dropdown box, required for the
computation of the variation alerter.
The possible values are:
Average
Max
Min
Sum.
For a Complex Alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the following options:
In the Formula field, drag and drop the appropriate indicators and mathematical /
logical / comparison operators from the right frame, to create the appropriate formula.
This must be done for each severity.
Click on Check Formula to validate the formula. If errors occur, re-attempt to create a
correct formula.
Select the appropriate Stability.
The periodicity unit is automatically updated whenever the periodicity changes.
Attention: Take in account that values are not multiplied by 100.
Result: The alerter parameters are defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If you want to create an alerter directly during the template creation, select the
Instantiate in alerter check box.
Result: New information appears in the second part of the Alerter Editor window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the case of Hour or Day periodicity, select the appropriate Data Validity Period.
The period of validity is a time interval during the day or a list of days, in which the
alerter can be evaluated.
Result: For example, if the Data Validity Period is 1H and the Repetition is 1H,
then the alerters are evaluated every one hour. If the Data Validity Period is 1H and
the Repetition is 12H, then the alerters are evaluated every two hours.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Check Activate on apply for the alerter to be automatically activated after its creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The alerter activation parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Check Automatic Clear for all the alerts to be cleared when the alerter state is changed
to inactive.
Result: The alerter clear parameter is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 During an alerter severity evaluation, if the alerter cannot be evaluated, either because the
value of the indicator is null or Nerr, or the complex formula results is null or Nerr value,
if Raise alert on error / no data cases is checked, an alert is generated for the current
severity and the alerter evaluation ends. If Raise alert on error / no data cases is not
checked, no alert is generated and the alerter evaluation continues with the next severity.
Result: The Raise alert on error / no data cases option is checked or unchecked as
required.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 The Object Type is automatically filled in when selecting the indicator, or in the case of
Complex alerters, from a formula.
If several options are available in a dropdown box, select the required option.
This does not display the zone object types.
Result: The Object Type is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Drag the appropriate network objects from the topology tab tree (in the right frame) and
drop them in the Network Objects panel.
Result: The selected objects will be evaluated in the alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 For the alerter to be evaluated for the whole Working Zone, check Entire Working Zone:
Global.
Result: The Entire Working Zone: Global option is defined.
When this is selected, the Topology tab from the right frame is disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Click on .
Result: A confirmation message appears.
If the Instantiate in alerter check box was checked, you must confirm the creation of
both the new alerter template and the new alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.2: Create an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The alerter template is created and appears in the Alerter template tree that is
automatically refreshed.
If the Instantiate in alerter check box was checked, also the created alerter appears
in the alerter tree of the alerter editor that is automatically refreshed.
If activate option was selected, the alerter is automatically activated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Note: All the created alerters are only available on the Analysis Desktop client, and
not on the NPO server. To send all the created alerts to the NPO server, ensure the
GENERATE_ALARM variable is set to true (this is the default value), in the
AlerterResourceFile.cfg file located in the
/alcatel/muse/MUSE_MAAT/alerter/rsc/com/alcatel/muse/maat/
alerter directory.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.3: Create an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor window, select Alerters tab in the left panel and click on .
Result: A window appears with the Template field contains the string:
Drop a template here. This string is replaced by the template name when you
drag on drop a template from the right Templates tab.
The window contains the information defined in the Alerter Template that was
selected and with some optional and some mandatory fields to be filled in. The fields
correspond to the scheduling part of the alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.3: Create an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-23
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.3: Create an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on .
Result: A confirmation message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-24 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.4: Create an alerter template by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter to copy from
the left frame, then click on .
Result: The Alerter Template Properties panel appears with the default name and
properties of the selected alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Define a name for the copied alerter template, using the following format:
<oldname_Copy_n>, where n is a unique incremental number.
Result: The name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Apply.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-25
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.5: Create an alerter by copy
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Alerters tab in the left panel and the alerter to copy from the
left frame, then click on .
Result: The Alerter Properties panel appears with the default name and properties of
the selected alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Define a name for the copied alerter , using the following format:
<oldname_Copy_n>, where n is a unique incremental number.
Result: The name is defined.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on Apply.
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-26 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.6: Edit an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter to edit from the
left frame, then click on .
Result: The Alerter Template Properties panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The alerter template modifications are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-27
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.7: Edit an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Alerters tab in the left panel and the alerter to edit from the
left frame, then click on .
Result: The Alerter Properties panel appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on Apply.
Result: The alerter modifications are defined.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-28 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.8: Delete an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter template(s) to
be deleted.
Result: The alerter template(s) are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-29
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.9: Delete an alerter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Alerters tab in the left panel and the alerter(s) to be deleted.
Result: The alerters are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: A confirmation window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-30 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.10: Export an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor, select Templates tab in the left panel and the alerter template(s) to
be exported.
Result: The alerter template(s) is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Browse for the location to save the alerter template(s) and give the appropriate File
Name.
Click on Save.
Result: The following message appears:
Export is done successfully.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on OK.
Result: The selected templates are exported in an xml alerter dictionary containing
only the selection. The file is exported in the location defined in the previous step.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The exported file can be re-imported on another system at the same plug installation level
(same system dictionaries) using NPO Import/Export Management web pages. Refer to
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import Alerter Template Dictionary using
GUI procedure.
If some of the exported alerter templates are referencing customer indicators, a warning
dialog is displayed indicating that the exported alerter templates may not be imported on
another system if the embedded customer indicators are not also exported and imported
on the other system before the import of these alerter templates.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-31
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.10: Export an alerter template
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The warning dialog also lists all the concerned customer indicators and a Propagate
button is available to allow propagating them into the corresponding functions (indicator)
trees. Then, from the corresponding function tree, the user can open the indicator editor
(by a right click) and export these customer indicators.
Refer to:
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Export QoS dictionary using GUI
NPO Administration User Guide document, to Import QoS dictionary using GUI.
Note: When a multi selection is done in a function tree of the Analysis Desktop and
the corresponding editor is opened from that tree (by a right click), the complete
selection is propagated in the editor (not only the first object).
Only the first object of the selection remains detailed in the edition part of the editor
window (as when doing a multi-selection directly in the left tree of an object editor).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-32 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.11: Use default alerters to detect BSC
without traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alerter Editor window, select an alerter from the list of default alerters.
Result: The alerter is selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on .
Result: The Edit popup window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Drag the appropriate BSCs from the topology tab tree (in the right frame) and drop them
in the Network Objects panel.
Result: The selected BSCs will be evaluated in the alerter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click on .
Result: The following list presents the alerters defined for detecting BSC with no
circuit traffic.
ALUDEF_TCH_total_failure - Cell no traffic alerter for 100% TCH failure
Formula for zero traffic alarm considering total traffic (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND (RTCH_success
== 0)Equivalent counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) +
((MC15b + MC15a) + (MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND ((MC718) +
(MC717a + MC717b)) = 0)
clear formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND (RTCH_success > 0)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND ((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) > 0)
ALUDEF_SDCCH_total_failure - Cell no traffic alerter for 100% SDCCH
failure
Formula for zero traffic alarm considering total traffic (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success == 0)Equivalent counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f))
> 25 AND ((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) = 0)
Clear formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND (SDCCH_success > 0)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND ((MC01 + MC02) +
(MC10)) > 0)
ALUDEF_no_paging - Cell no traffic alerter for 0% Paging
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-33
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.11: Use default alerters to detect BSC
without traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Formula for zero paging (CS + PS) traffic alarm:
Critical Condition: raise formula (CCCH_PCH == 0)Equivalent counters
formula:(MC8a) = 0
Clear formula (CCCH_PCH > 0)Equivalent counters formula:(MC8a) > 0
ALUDEF_TCH_high_failure - Cell traffic alerter for High TCH failure
Formula for degraded traffic alarm (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical Condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND
(RTCH_success_rate > 0%) AND (RTCH_success_rate =< 20%)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) / ((MC140a - (MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) >0% ) AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) / ((MC140a - (MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) =<20% )
Major Condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND
(RTCH_success_rate > 0%) AND (RTCH_success_rate =< 50%)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) / ((MC140a - (MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) >0% ) AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) / ((MC140a - (MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) =<50% )
Minor Condition: raise formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND
(RTCH_success_rate > 0%) AND (RTCH_success_rate =< 80%)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) / ((MC140a - (MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) >0% ) AND (((MC718) + (MC717a +
MC717b)) / ((MC140a - (MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) =<80% )
Clear formula (RTCH_request > 25) AND (RTCH_success_rate > 90%)
Equivalent counters formula:(((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b +
MC15a) + (MC541a + MC561 +MC551))) > 25 AND (((MC718) + (MC717a
+ MC717b)) / ((MC140a-(MC142e+MC142f)) + ((MC15b + MC15a) +
(MC541a + MC561 +MC551)))) > 90%)
ALUDEF_SDCCH_high_failure - Cell traffic alerter for high SDCCH failure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-34 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Procedure 25-1.11: Use default alerters to detect BSC
without traffic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Formula for degraded traffic alarm (Normal ASSIGN + HO):
Critical Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success_rate >0%) AND (SDCCH_success_rate =< 20%)Equivalent
counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND (((MC01 + MC02) +
(MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) + (MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) >0%)
AND (((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) =< 20%)
Major Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success_rate >0%) AND (SDCCH_success_rate =< 50%)equivalent
counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND (((MC01 + MC02) +
(MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) + (MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) >0%)
AND (((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) =< 50%)
Minor Condition: raise formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND
(SDCCH_success_rate >0%) AND (SDCCH_success_rate =< 80%)
Equivalent counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25 AND (((MC01 +
MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) + (MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101)))
>0%) AND (((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) =< 80%)
Clear formula (SDCCH_request > 25) AND (SDCCH_success_rate >
90%)Equivalent counters formula:(((MC922a) - (MC922f)) > 25) AND
(((MC01 + MC02) + (MC10)) / ((MC04 + MC148) +
(MC147+MC81+MC91+MC101))) >90%)
Note: The equivalent counter formulas are for information purposes only.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-35
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Display and use alerter list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If an alert with the same severity already exists for the same alerter and same object,
the existing alert is updated
If an alert exists for same alerter and same object, but a new severity is evaluated (up /
down), the existing alert is cleared and a new one generated
in the case of a problem during evaluation, the alerter state is set to failed
The alerts are kept until they are cleared by the system or the user
If cleared is fulfilled, and an alert exists, the alert is removed
If a GP is missing on the requested stability, the alerter is not evaluated and alerts are
not generated
For variation alerters, if a GP is missing for the observation period, the algorithm will
only use present values.
To Click on
Update the alerter list Refresh
Edit the current selected alerter Edit
The Alerter Editor window opens.
Perform the actions described in Procedure
25-1.7: Edit an alerter (p. 25-28).
Activate the selected alerter after checking the Activate
owner status A confirmation window appears.
Click on Yes.
The first evaluation of the alerter occurs at the
next deadline of the granularity period in the
validity period.
If the user is not the owner or the
administrator, or if the alerter is already active,
the Activate button is grayed.
Deactivate the selected alerter after checking Deactivate
the owner status A confirmation window appears.
Click on Yes.
If the user is not the owner or the
administrator, or if the alerter is already
inactive, the Deactivate button is grayed.
If Automatic Clear is checked in the Alerter
Editor, all the alerts of this alerter are
suppressed.
Close the alerter window Close
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-37
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Display and use alerter list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: You can also right click on the required alerter(s), then select from the popup
menu:
Edit
Activate
Deactivate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Select all alerts Select All
Deselect all alert(s) Deselect All
Acknowledge all the selected alert(s) Acknowledge
If any of the selected alerts is already
acknowledged, the Acknowledge button is
grayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 25-39
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Alerters Display and use alerts list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Click on
Clear all the selected alert(s) Clear
An alert should be cleared if:
No alert is to be generated
The Cleared criterion is satisfied
There is currently an alert present on the
current object.
The alerts are not cleared when the alerter
definition is modified.
Edit the alerter for which the alert is generated Edit Alerter
Perform the actions described in Procedure
25-1.7: Edit an alerter (p. 25-28).
Close the alerter window Close
Note: You can also right click on the required alerter(s), then select from the popup
menu:
Edit Alerter
Copy
Propagate -> Network Object(s) / Indicator(s).
Acknowledge.
Clear
Hide Acknowledged Alerts.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
25-40 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
26 User preferences
26
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the user preferences.
Contents
Presentation 26-1
Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences 26-2
General user preferences 26-2
Views / reports user preferences 26-5
Cartography user preferences 26-10
3D views user preferences 26-11
Layout user preferences 26-13
Save user preferences implicitly 26-14
Presentation
The Analysis Desktop can be configured to suit the individual preferences of each user.
This allows you to choose, for example, a preferred layout, or which keys to use for
different actions, the default directory for export, etc.
These settings apply only to the user currently logged onto the Analysis Desktop. They do
not affect settings made by any other user when that user is logged on. These settings can
be changed by regular users, as well as by the administrator user.
Once these settings are saved, each time the operator re-opens Analysis Desktop, the
defined preferences are used.
If the related FAD is not provided to the user, the related setting is not available, so it
cannot be selected from the User Preferences window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 26-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Procedure 26-1: Configure user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click on OK.
Result: The Analysis Desktop refreshes according to the new User Preferences and
changes appear to the user immediately. The modified User Preferences are saved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
26-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences General user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 26-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences General user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 26-1 General user preferences parameters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
26-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences General user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 26-1 General user preferences parameters (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 26-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Views / reports user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
26-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Views / reports user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 26-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Views / reports user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
26-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Views / reports user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
26-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Cartography user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 26-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences 3D views user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
26-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences 3D views user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following error message appears if the same dimension is present in two locations:
Two or more dimensions are the same. Please change your choice.
To Do
Save current From the menu bar, select Window -> Save Layout.
layout with your
customized
preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 26-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
User preferences Layout user preferences
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To Do
Use pre-defined From the menu bar, select Window -> Layouts, then:
Analysis Desktop Default Layout, to keep the Analysis Desktop pre-defined default
window layouts layout: displays the Analysis Desktop with all the browsers (mode,
view and report).
Maximize Report, to enlarge the executed reports browser area (to
67%). The mode browser is displayed and occupies the remaining part.
Maximize Trees, to enlarge the topology and functions trees area (to
67%). The executed view window is displayed and occupies the
remaining part.
Maximize View, to enlarge the executed views browser area (to 67%).
The topology and functions area is displayed and occupies the
remaining part.
Report Full View, to maximize the executed reports browser area. The
mode browser and the executed view browser are hidden.
User-Defined Layout, to display the layout as it was when last saved
by user.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
26-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
27 Icons
27
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the icons.
Contents
Refer to the following table for a list of the icons and their corresponding descriptions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Tool bar icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-1 Tool bar icons and descriptions (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Tool bar icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-1 Tool bar icons and descriptions (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-3
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Tool bar icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-1 Tool bar icons and descriptions (continued)
Topology icons
GSM, W-CDMA and LTE objects and icon types
The following tables presents the list of GSM, W-CDMA and LTE objects and icon types.
Note: Not all the objects are described in these tables. Only main objects are listed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-4 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-5
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
GSM850-
GSM1900
GSM850-
GSM1800
GSM850
EGSM900
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-6 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-7
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-8 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
The icon is
displayed
only when a
user note
exists.
Cell Zone, System Editable Not computed, User - [Cell Zone
TRXZone, Customer Non Editable Computed and Note name] if the cell
2G Object public empty zone is
Zone & Computed and The computed and
Customer
Other Object not empty icon is non-empty
private
Zones displayed (except for the
only Network): [Cell
when a Zone name]
user [number of cell]
note
exists.
GSM 2G User Note Deleted - - - GSM 2G
External This icon is External Cells
Cells The icon is only name
displayed displayed
only when a when the
user note object is
exists. deleted.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-9
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-10 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-2 GSM Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-11
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-12 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-3 W-CDMA Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-13
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-3 W-CDMA Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-14 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 27-3 W-CDMA Network Objects in a Topology Tree (continued)
Note: Depending on the status of the Show Soft-Deleted Objects user preference,
objects that are soft-deleted are either visible or not in all topology trees. This user
preference does not affect the Tuning Operations tree rendering (i.e. even if the user
preference asks to hide soft-deleted objects, the new object created in the Tuning
Session remains visible).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-15
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Topology icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function icons
The following tables presents a list of the GSM, W-CDMA and LTE functions and icon
types.
Table 27-6 Function icons - Counter
Matrix
Axis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-16 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Function icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Without
threshold
and / or
Sampling
(icon is
blank)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-17
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Function icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-18 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Function icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-19
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Function icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-20 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
Icons Function icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Warning Red,
- Worst Orange
&
Warning Yellow
- Best
Orange
Only
Orange
&
Yellow
Yellow
Only
Green,
Yellow
&
Orange
Green
&
Yellow
Green
Only
Absolute
Variation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 27-21
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011 Relative
Variation
Icons Function icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
27-22 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011
28 NPO example files
28
Overview
Purpose
This section describes how to download some NPO example files.
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NPO Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary 28-1
npoug Release M4 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 10 March 2011
NPO example files Procedure 28-1: Download NPO example files
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Windows Client PC, type the corresponding server hostname or the server IP
address in an Internet Explorer browser bar:
https://<server_hostname> or <server_IP_address>
Note: If you use the hostname, it must be added in the hosts file located in the
C:/WINDOWS/system32/drivers/etc directory.
If a Security warning page opens, click on Continue to this website (not
recommended).
Result: The Alcatel-Lucent CSA login window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Right click on Download example files and select Save Target As...
Save the Examples_files.zip file on the Windows Client PC. Close the Download
Complete window.
Result: The Examples_files.zip file is saved on the Windows Client PC and you can
open the needed file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
28-2 Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary NPO
Use pursuant to applicable agreements npoug Release M4
Issue 10 March 2011